Home

Samsung LN40B650 manual do usuário

Contents

1. O Cabo HDMI n o fornecido 1 Conecte um cabo HDMI entre a tomada HDMI IN 1 2 3 DVI IN 4 da TV e a sa da PC do seu computador 4 Cada PC possui uma configura o diferente para o painel traseiro Portugu s 12 Visualiza o dos menus Antes de usar a TV siga as etapas abaixo para aprender como utilizar o menu para selecionar e ajustar as diferentes fun es VOL E on MENU Exibir o menu na tela me Em 55 IE MENU FAV CH oo EZ RETURN S J Voltar ao menu anterior ENTER C DIRECTION Move o cursor e seleciona un _ _ item Selecionar o item atualmente selecionado Confirma a EXIT configura o vo Ay Sai do menu de tela Opera o do Menu Exibi o na tela As etapas de acesso podem ser diferentes dependendo do menu selecionado w 1 Pressione o bot o MENU CH LIST l Fave Dg 4 N A 2 O menu principal aparece na tela A lateral esquerda do menu possui cones Imagem Som Canal Configura o Entrada Aplicativos Suporte we att Modo Padr o wabeu Luz de Fundo Contraste Brilho Nitidez Cor Matiz Vd Vm Configura es Avan adas 3 Pressione o bot o A ou Y para selecionar um dos cones Ent o pressione o bot o ENTER Ls para acessar o submenu do cone 5 Pressione o bot o A ou Y para selecione o submenu do cone e Luz de Fundo wabeu Contraste Brilho 245
2. Model Name LN40B650 LN46B650 LN55B650 Screen Size Diagonal 40 inches 46 inches 55 inches Power Consumption Normal operation TBD TBD TBD Standby TBD TBD TBD PC Resolution 1920 x 1080 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 60 Hz Sound Output 10W x 2 10W x 2 15Wx2 Dimensions WxDxH Without Stand 39 2 x 3 1 x 25 6 inch 44 3 x 3 1 x 28 8 inch 51 6 x 3 1 x 33 1 inch 995 1 x 78 6 x 650 4 mm 1126 1 x 78 6 x 730 3 mm 1310 8 x 79 9 x 841 8 mm With stand 39 2 x 10 0 x 27 8 inch 44 3 x 10 9 x 30 8 inch 51 6 x 12 0 x 35 2 inch 995 1 x 255 0 x 705 9 mm 1126 1 x 277 0 x 783 4 mm 1310 8 x 305 0 x 894 8 mm Weight Without Stand 32 6 Ibs 14 8 kg 42 8 Ibs 19 4 kg 64 8 Ibs 29 4 kg With Stand 41 2 Ibs 18 7 kg 53 8 Ibs 24 4 kg 76 5 Ibs 34 7 kg Environmental Considerations Operating Temperature Operating Humidity 50 F to 104 F 10 C to 40 C 10 to 80 non condensing Storage Temperature 4 F to 113 F 20 C to 45 C Storage Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Stand Swivel Left Right 20 20 Design and specifications are subject to change without prior notice This device is a Class B digital apparatus For the power supply and Power Consumption refer to the label attached to the product English 83 e This product uses parts of the software from the Independent JPEG Group e This product uses parts of the software owned by the Freetype Project www freetype org
3. 8 ES Photo Music Movie Setup SUM Retornar b SNSNNSS 5 S Portugu s 40 Uso do botao de controle remoto no menu Media Play Botao Opera es Alv ia Move o cursor e seleciona um item Selecionar o item atualmente selecionado Ao reproduzir uma apresenta o de slides filme ENTER G ou m sica f Pressionar o bot o ENTER Ls durante a reprodu o pausa a reprodu o Pressionar o bot o ENTER L lt durante a pausa retoma a reprodu o J qm Reproduzir ou pausar a apresenta o de slides m sica ou filme RETURN Voltar ao menu anterior TOOLS Executar v rias fun es dos menus de foto m sica e filme E Parar o arquivo de apresenta o de slides m sica ou filme atual lt p gt Avan ar para o grupo anterior Avan ar para o pr ximo grupo INFO Exibir informa es do arquivo MEDIA P Sair do modo Media Play vV CHA EXIT TV Interrompe o modo Media Play e retorna ao modo TV i Fun o Media Play Esta fun o permite exibir e ouvir arquivos de foto musica e ou filme salvos em um dispositivo de classe de armazenamento em massa USB MSC Acesso ao menu Media Play USB amp DLNA sum E PHOTO o 1 Pressione o bot o MENU Pressione o bot o A ou Y para selecionar Aplicativos e em seguida pressione ENTER Ls 2 Pressione o bot o A ou Y para selecionar
4. English 6 Connecting Cable TV To connect to a cable TV system follow the instructions below Cable without a Cable Box Plug the incoming cable into the ANT 2 IN CABLE terminal on the back of the TV Because this TV is cable ready you do not need a cable box to view unscrambled cable Connecting to a Cable Box that Descrambles All Channels N 2 Connect the other end of this cable to the ANT 2 IN CABLE terminal on the back of the Connecting to a Cable Box that Descrambles Some Channels channels ANT 2 IN CABLE Find the cable that is connected to the ANT OUT terminal on your cable box _ This terminal might be labeled ANT OUT VHF OUT or simply OUT ANTIN ANT OUT Pr N TV ANT 2 IN CABLE If your cable box descrambles only some channels such as premium channels follow the instructions below You will need a two way splitter an RF A B switch and four lengths of RF cable These items are available at most electronics stores Incoming cable TV Rear Splitter RF A B Switch Cable Box O o gt oN Find and disconnect the cable that is connected to the ANT IN terminal on your cable box This terminal might be labeled ANT IN VHF IN or simply IN Connect this cable to a two way splitter Connect an RF cable between the OUTPUT terminal on the splitter and the IN terminal on th
5. Compartilhador de IP K com sem fio aa S o T NE Telefone celular Qp ES wa Cabo de rede Painel lateral da TV d Compartilhador de IP com sem fio Telefone celular Cabo de rede Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter Portugu s 73 H Configurando o Centro de Rede Dom stica Q Mensag Exibe uma lista de telefones celulares que foram configurados com a TV para o uso da fun o de mensagens recebimento de chamadas conte do de mensagens de texto e compromissos definidos no telefone celular Centro de rede dom stica EZA Mensag 111 1234 5671 Acesso Permitido Wi M dia 111 1234 5672 Acesso Autoriza o telefone celular 6 Configura o 111 1234 5673 Recusado 111 1234 5674 Recusado Recusado Bloqueia o telefone celular D Retornar Sair Excluir Exclui o telefone celular da lista Essa fun o simplesmente exclui o nome da lista Caso o dispositivo m vel exclu do seja ligado ou tente se conectar TV ele poder ser exibido na lista W Media Exibe uma lista de telefones celulares dispon veis para o controle de conte do de m dia gema v deos fotos m sicas a partir do telefone Al m do telefone celular tamb m h outros dispositivos m veis que oferecem de Rede Dom stica Mensag Mensag suporte a DLNA DMC To Permitido A Configura o Nome
6. Horizontal frequency kHz 30 60 Vertical frequency Hz 60 75 PC Maximum refresh rate at 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 Image is not centered on the screen Adjust the horizontal and vertical position The screen position must be adjusted on the output source i e STB with a digital signal English 78 Problem Possible Solution The picture appears distorted in the corner of the screen If Screen Fit When is selected with some external devices the picture may appear distorted in the corner of the screen This symptom is caused by the external devices not TV The Resets all settings to the default values message appears This appears when you press and hold the EXIT button for a while The product settings are reset to the factory defaults Internet connection does not work You may experience slow operation or hesitation when using this function due to network conditions When unable to connect to a wired network If your Internet service provider has registered the MAC address of the device used to connect to the Internet for the first time and authenticates the MAC address each time you connect to the Internet your TV may not be able to connect to the Internet as the MAC address differs from that of the device PC In this case ask your Internet service provider about the procedures to connect devices other than your PC such as your TV to the Internet If your Internet service p
7. c You must license the entire work as a whole under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy This License will therefore apply along with any applicable section 7 additional terms to the whole of the work and all its parts regardless of how they are packaged This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it d If the work has interactive user interfaces each must display Appropriate Legal Notices however if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices your work need not make them do so A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium is called an aggregate if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation s users beyond what the individual works permit Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate Conveying Non Source Forms You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5 provided that you also convey the machine readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License in one of t
8. e This product uses some software programs which are distributed under the GPL LGPL license Accordingly the following GPL and LGPL software source codes that have been used in this product can be provided after asking to viswmanager samsung com GPL software Linux Kernel Busybox Binutils LGPL software Glibc ffmpeg smpeg libgphoto libusb SDL E GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 3 29 June 2007 Copyright C 2007 Free Software Foundation Inc lt http fsf org gt Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The GNU General Public License is a free copyleft license for software and other kinds of works The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program to make sure it remains free software for all its users We the Free Software Foundation use the GNU General Public License for most of our software it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for them if you wish that you receive s
9. 1 Pressione o bot o MEDIA P 2 Pressione o bot o lt ou gt para selecionar Photo e em seguida pressione o bot o ENTER L lt 3 Pressione o bot o Y para ir se o de lista de arquivos 4 Pressione o bot o lt ou gt para selecionar o arquivo de foto desejado Sele o m ltipla de fotos Pressione o bot o lt ou gt para selecionar o arquivo de foto desejado Em seguida pressione o bot o amarelo Repita a opera o acima para selecionar diversos arquivos de foto Amarca Y aparece no arquivo de foto selecionado 5 Pressione o bot o TOOLS O menu de op o muda de acordo com o status atual Q Apresenta o de slides Usando este menu voc pode reproduzir um slide show usando os arquivos de fotos no dispositivo de mem ria USB Q Copiar Copiar grupo atual Cop arq sel Quando diversos arquivos ae eo de est o selecionados z 7 peas Copiar grupo atual pas A i Informag es Selecione uma foto que deseja copiar Ou selecione varios arquivos pressionando o v bot o amarelo Pressione o bot o TOOLS para selecionar Copiar ou Copiar grupo atual Cop arq sel Os arquivos no dispositivo USB s o salvos na mem ria da TV Voc s pode copiar os arquivos salvos no dispositivo USB Quando a mem ria da TV est cheia arquivos n o podem ser copiados O Excluir Excluir tudo Apagar arq selecionado Quando v rios arquivos est o selecionados Selecione uma foto para excluir Ou seleci
10. 2 Connect a PC Audio Cable between the PC IN AUDIO jack on the TV and the Audio Out jack of the sound card on your computer If your PC supports an HDMI connection you can connect this to the HDMI IN 1 2 3 DVI IN or 4 terminal If your PC supports a DVI connection you can connect this to the HDMI IN3 DVI IN terminal Using the HDMI DVI Cable TV Rear Panel PC 3 5 mm Stereo mini plug 2RCA Cable Not supplied E jm e HDMI DVI Cable Not supplied 1 Connect an HDMI DVI cable between the HDMI IN3 DVI IN jack on the TV and the PC output jack on your computer 2 Connect a 3 5 mm Stereo miniplug 2RCA Cable between the DVI IN AUDIO jack on the TV and the Audio Out jack of the sound card on your computer When using an HDMI DVI cable connection you must use the HDMI IN3 DVI IN terminal Using the HDMI Cable TV Side Panel TV Rear Panel HDMI Cable Not supplied 1 Connect an HDMI cable between the HDMI IN 1 2 3 DVI IN 4 jack on the TV and the PC output jack on your computer Each PC has a different back panel configuration English 12 Viewing the menus Before using the TV follow the steps below to learn how to navigate the menu in order to select and adjust different functions VOL E en MENU Button H Display the main on screen menu e Fav ck RETURN Button ENTE
11. Selecione um item do conte do na p gina Contents Download Fa a o download do conte do para o dispositivo de mem ria USB Acesse o menu principal da Content Library pressionando o bot o CONTENT ou selecionando Content Library Menu Aplicativos gt Content Library Conecte a mem ria USB na porta USB da lateral da TV e Conte do fornecido Conte do adicional dispon vel no site www samsung com Configura o e Prote o de tela Selecione para configurar o tempo de espera antes da exibi o do protetor de tela e Salvar UDN Salva o n mero UDN em um dispositivo USB Dispositivos de armazenamento USB com formata o NTFS n o suportam a grava o de UDN Recomendamos a utiliza o de um dispositivo de armazenamento USB com formata o FAT Portugu s 67 INTERNET TV Esta fun o pode ser suportada dependendo do pais Se voc tiver problemas enquanto estiver usando um servi o de widget entre em contato com o provedor do servi o No widget pressione o bot o verde e obtenha informa es de contato ou consulte a ajuda do site para informa es do provedor de servi o O ingl s pode ser suportado no servi o de widget dependendo da regi o E Fun es b sicas de Internet TV Internet TV fornece os servi os de widget da SAMSUNG atrav s de uma conex o com a Internet O conte do do Internet TV pode ser alterado dependendo do provedor de conte do Voc pode acessar v rias informa es como o You
12. When you watch TV with it connecting to a Home theater turn the TV speakers off so you can listen to sound from the Home theater s external speakers e External Speaker Used to listen to the sound of the External Home Theater Speakers e TV Speaker Used to listen to the sound of the TV Speakers If you select External Speaker in the Speaker Select menu the sound settings will be limited English 25 The volume and MUTE buttons do not operate when the Speaker Select is set to External Speaker Please set the volume on your Home theater TV s Internal Speakers Audio Out Optical L R Out to Sound System RF AV Component PC HDMI RF AV Component PC HDMI TV Speaker Speaker Output Speaker Output External Speaker Mute Speaker Output Video No Signal Mute Mute Q Sound Select Main Sub When the PIP feature is activated you can listen to the sound of the sub PIP picture You can select this option when PIP is set to On A Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu You can also set the sound of the sub picture by selecting Tools PIP Sound Select Q Sound Reset Reset All Reset Sound Mode Cancel You can restore the Sound settings to the factory defaults Select the sound reset options Reset Sound Mode Current sound values return to default settings Reset All Reset Sound Mode 4b Move Cs Enter O Return il Connecting Headphones Sold separately You can connect
13. m Setting up Internet TV m Using the Internet TV service m Viewing the menus m Placing Your Television in Standby Mode mPlug amp Play Feature m Troubleshooting for internet TV m Help Website CHANNEL m Channel Menu TERRA WIDGETS m Managing Channels m Weather Forecast Widget m News Widget PICTURE m Widget Ticker m Picture Menu m Viewing Picture in Picture HOME NETWORK CENTER BPC Display ms ana m Home Network Center m Setting up the TV with your PC m Setting Up the Home Netw m Using the Message Function m Using the Media Function E Sound Ment eee ae E R EAA EEEE EEE A 25 m Connecting Headphones Sold separately sssssssssscescseeeees 26 RECOMMENDATIONS m Troubleshooting SETUP m Installing the Stand m Setup Menu 7 m Disconnecting the Stand m Setting the Time m Assembling the Cables m Network Connection m Wall Mount Kit Specifications VESA m Anti Theft Kensington Lock m Setting the Network z m Securing the Installation Space INPUT SUPPORT m Securing the TV to the Wall m Specifications m Input Menu m Support Menu MEDIA PLAY USB amp DLNA m Connecting a USB Device m Media Play Function m Sorting the Photo List m Photo List Option Menu m Viewing a Photo or Slide Show 45 m Slide Show Option Menu 46 m Sorting the Music List 48 m Music List Option Menu 49 m Playing Music 50 m Musi
14. poss vel conectar a LAN por meio de um distribuidor roteador Porta LAN na parede Distribuidor de IP roteador Cabo de rede Painel traseiro da TV Cabo de rede ts 8 Ss Boe B Os terminais a posi o e o tipo da porta do dispositivo externo podem variar dependendo do fabricante Se voc estiver usando um endere o IP est tico seu provedor de internet informar o endere o IP a m scara de sub rede o gateway e o DNS Voc deve inserir estes valores para concluir as configura es da rede Se voc n o souber os valores pergunte ao administrador da rede Para obter mais informa es sobre como configurar e conectar um distribuidor roteador consulte o manual do propriet rio do produto correspondente Voc pode conectar a TV LAN diretamente sem passar pelo distribuidor roteador Se voc utilizar um distribuidor de IP roteador de IP que ofere a suporte a DHCP voc poder configurar o dispositivo como DHOP ou IP est tico Para obter os procedimentos de uso de um endere o IP est tico solicite ao seu provedor de internet Portugu s 32 Q Conex o de Rede Sem fio poss vel conectar rede de modo sem fio atrav s de um distribuidor de IP sem fio Painel lateral da TV Samsung Wireless I Adaptador de LAN ou Porta LAN na Compartilhador de IP parede Cabo de rede 1 Conecte o Adaptador de rede sem
15. 51 a Movie List Option Menu 1 Press the MEDIA P button 2 Press the lt or gt button to select Movie then press the ENTER C4 button 3 Press the Y button to move to the File List Section 4 Press the lt or gt button to select the desired Movie file Selecting Multiple Movie Files Press the lt or gt button to select the desired movie file Then press the Yellow button Repeat the above operation to select multiple movie files The mark v appears to the selected movie file 5 Press the TOOLS button The option menu changes according to the current status O Play Current Group Using this menu you can only play movie files in the currently selected sorting group O Copy Copy Current Group Copy the selected file When multiple files are selected Select the movie to copy Alternatively select multiple files by pressing the Yellow button Press the TOOLS button to select Copy or Copy Current Group Copy the selected file The files on the USB device are saved to the TV memory You can only copy the files saved on the USB device When the TV memory is full files cannot be copied Q Delete Delete All Delete Selected File When multiple files are selected Select the file to delete Alternatively select multiple files by pressing the Yellow button Press the TOOLS button to select Delete or Delete All Delete Selected File The files are deleted You can only delete the files saved in th
16. Check with that service provider In the widget press the green button and get contact information or refer to help website for widget service provider information Refer to Help website page What is the advantage of single sign on If you create account and register your login information of desired service you can access personalized content without additional login When a network error occurred can t use other menus except setting menu If network connection doesn t work your service might be limited Because all of function except setting menu are needed to connect internet Is there any possibility to show adult movies on YouTube Basically at the list on the menu it is filtered out But by using search function It can be shown In this case using the Widget Gallery lock the widget service A Help Website Country Website Argentina www samsung com Consumidor televisores Samsung media2 0 Internet TV Brazil www samsung com Produtos gt TV Samsung media2 0 gt Internet TV Chile www samsung com Consumidor televisores Samsung media2 0 gt Internet TV Colombia www samsung com Productos television gt Samsung media2 0 gt Internet TV Latin www samsung com Productos televisores Samsung media2 0 gt Internet TV Peru www samsung com Consumidor televisores Samsung media2 0 Internet TV Approaching step may be
17. Enquanto Internet TV estiver em funcionamento n o poss vel usar a fun o PIP Se voc desligar a TV e lig la novamente no modo PIP a janela PIP desaparecer ou karaoke O PIP gt Ligado Desligado Voc pode ativar ou desativar a fun o PIP Q Tamanho gt ml EE mm Voc pode selecionar um tamanho da subimagem Q Posi o gt ID IIETIL Voc pode selecionar uma posi o da subimagem No modo Duplo m ME n o poss vel selecionar Posi o O Ar Cabo Ar Cabo Seleciona ar ou cabo como fonte de entrada da subtela O Canal poss vel selecionar o canal da subtela Display do computador Economia de Energia Desligado o o a E S D Voc pode observar que a imagem na janela PIP se torna um pouco artificial ao usar a tela principal para visualizar um jogo PIP PIP Ligado Tamanho Posi o Ar Cabo Canal Mover Entrar D Retornar Configurando o software do PC baseado no Windows XP Os ajustes de exibi o do Windows para um computador padr o s o exibidos a seguir As telas do PC provavelmente ser o diferentes dependendo da vers o particular do Windows e da placa de v deo Entretanto as mesmas informa es de configura o b sica ser o aplicadas na maioria dos casos ainda que as telas sejam diferentes Do contr rio entre em contato com o fabricante do computad
18. Network Setup Child Lock On Cable Change PIN Connect to the network using a cable es pri Wireless Preference Connect to the network wirelessly Q Network Setup Cable Network Setup when Network Type is set to Cable 2 Please check if the LAN cable is connected e Internet Protocol Setup Auto Setup Manual Setup e Network Test You can test or confirm the network connection status after setting up the network When unable to connect to a wired network If your Internet service provider has registered the MAC address of the device used to connect to the Internet for the first time and authenticates the MAC address each time you connect to the Internet your TV may not be able to connect to the Internet as the MAC address differs from that of the device PC In this case ask your Internet service provider about the procedures to connect devices other than your PC such as your TV to the Internet If your Internet service provider requires an ID or password to connect to the Internet network your TV may not be able to connect to the Internet In this case you have to enter your ID or password when connecting to the Internet using an Internet Sharer Router The internet connection may fail due to a firewall problem In this case contact your Internet service provider If you cannot connect to the Internet even if you have followed the procedures of your Internet service provider please contact Samsung Electronics
19. Repita a opera o acima para selecionar diversos arquivos de filme Pressione o bot o gt Reproduzir ENTER C4 Somente o arquivo selecionado reproduzido Reprodu o cont nua de filmes Se voc sair da fun o de reproduzir filme o filme poder ser reproduzido mais tarde do ponto onde parou 1 Selecione o arquivo de filme que deseja reproduzir continuamente pressionando o bot o lt ou gt para selecion lo na lista de filmes Pressione o bot o gt Reproduzir ENTER Ls Selecione Lemb reprod cont filme pressionando o bot o azul A reprodu o do filme iniciar de onde havia parado Se a fun o Lemb reprod cont filme estiver definida como Ligado no menu de configura o uma mensagem aparecer quando voc retomar a reprodu o de um arquivo de filme Portugu s 53 il Menu de op o de reprodu o de filme Menu de op o de reprodu o de filme Ferramentas Q Configura o de imagem Configura o de som Voc pode configurar os ajustes de imagem e som WU Tamanho da imagem Mover 3 Entrar 1 Sair Ajustar Reproduzir v deo no tamanho da tela da TV Original Reproduzir v deo no tamanho original Q Configura o de legenda Voc pode definir as legendas para o filme Legenda Ligado Desligado Voc pode ativar ou desativar as legendas para o filme Tamanho da legenda Pequeno Normal Grande poss vel alterar o tamanho d
20. The difference between HDMI and DVI is that the HDMI device is smaller in size and has the HDCP High Bandwidth Digital Copy Protection coding feature installed The TV may not output sound and pictures may be displayed with abnormal color when DVD Blu ray player Cable Box Satellite receiver Set Top Box supporting HDMI versions older than 1 3 are connected When connecting an older HDMI cable and there is no sound connect the HDMI cable to the HDMI IN3 DVI IN jack and the audio cables to the DVI IN AUDIO jacks on the back of the TV If this happens contact the company that provided the DVD Blu ray player Cable Box Satellite receiver Set Top Box to confirm the HDMI version then request an upgrade HDMI cables that are not 1 3 may cause annoying flicker or no screen display E Connecting a DVD Blu ray player Cable Box Satellite receiver Set Top Box via DVI This connection can only be made if there is a DVI Output connector on the external device DVD Blu ray player Cable Box Satellite receiver Set Top Box TV Rear Panel O DVI to HDMI Cable Not supplied Audio Cable Not supplied 1 Connect a DVI to HDMI Cable or DVI HDMI Adapter between the HDMI IN3 DVI IN jack on the TV and the DVI jack on the DVD Blu ray player Cable Box Satellite receiver Set Top Box 2 Connect Audio Cables between the DVI IN AUDIO jack on the TV and
21. TruSurround delivers a compelling virtual surround sound experience through any two speaker playback system including internal television speakers It is fully compatible with all multichannel formats Q Audio Language You can change the default value for audio languages Displays the language information for the incoming stream While viewing a digital channel this function can be selected You can only select the language among the actual languages being broadcast O Multi Track Sound MTS analog channels only A Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu You can also set the Multi Track Sound by selecting Tools Multi Track Sound Mono Choose for channels that are broadcasting in mono or if you are having difficulty receiving a stereo signal Stereo Choose for channels that are broadcasting in stereo SAP Choose to listen to the Separate Audio Program which is usually a foreign language translation Multi Track Sound is available only in Analog TV mode Depending on the particular program being broadcast you can listen to Mono Stereo or SAP Auto Volume Off On Each broadcasting station has its own signal conditions and so it is not easy to adjust the volume every time the channel is changed This feature lets you automatically adjust the volume of the desired channel by lowering the sound output when the modulation signal is high or by raising the sound output when the modulation signal is low O Speaker Select
22. gt button Exit the guide Press the blue button If the next programme is selected it is scheduled with the clock icon displayed If the ENTER Ls button is pressed again press the 4 gt button to select Cancel Schedules the scheduling is cancelled with the clock icon gone View programme information Select a programme of your choice by pressing the A Y lt gt button Then press the INFO button when the programme of your choice is highlighted The programme title is on the upper part of the screen center Please click on INFO button for the detailed information Channel Number Running Time Status Bar Parental Level Video Quality Information HD SD Sound Modes Subtitle or Teletext languages of Subtitle or Teletext and brief summary of the highlighted programme are included on the detailed information will be appeared if the summary is long Toggle between the Mini Guide and Full Guide Press the Red button repeatedly In Full Guide Scrolls backwards quickly 24 hours Scrolls forwards quickly 24 hours Press the Green button repeatedly Press the Yellow button repeatedly In Mini Guide Display previous page quickly Press the Green button Display next page quickly Press the Yellow button English 16 i Managing Channels Using this menu you can add delete or set favorite channels and use the program guide for digital broadcasts All Channels Shows a
23. o de Modo filme e Auto1 Ajusta a imagem automaticamente para a melhor qualidade ao assistir a um filme e Auto2 Otimiza o texto de v deo da tela n o incluindo closed captions mensagens de texto na tela automaticamente ao assistir um filme Auto Motion Plus 120Hz Desligado N tido Padr o Suave Personalizado Demonstra o Remove o movimento arrastado de cenas r pidas com muitos movimentos para fornecer uma imagem mais limpa Caso ative Auto Motion Plus 120Hz podem surgir ru dos na tela Caso isso ocorra defina Auto Motion Plus 120Hz como Desligado Desligado Desliga o Auto Motion Plus 120 Hz N tido Define Auto Motion Plus 120Hz como m nimo Padr o Define Auto Motion Plus 120Hz como m dio Suave Define Auto Motion Plus 120Hz como m ximo Personalizado Ajusta o n vel de redu o de persist ncia e vibra o de acordo com sua prefer ncia Redu o de Persist ncia Ajusta o n vel de redu o de persist ncia em fontes de video Redu o de Vibra o Ajusta o n vel de redu o de vibra o das fontes de video ao reproduzir filmes Restaurar Padr es Redefine configura es personalizadas e Demo Exibe a diferen a entre os modos Auto Motion Plus 120Hz ligado e desligado Modo Somente Azul Desligado Ligado Esta fun o destina se aos conhecedores de medi o AV Esta fun o exibe o sinal de azul apenas atrav s da remo o dos sinais de vermelho e de verde do sinal de v
24. Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work Basic Permissions All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output given its content constitutes a covered work This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent as provided by copyright law You may make run and propagate covered works that you do not convey without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you or provide you with facilities for running those works provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright T
25. M sica de fundo Desligado Ligado e Desligado A m sica de fundo n o reproduzida e Ligado Quando a m sica de fundo estiver dispon vel se voc selecionar Ligado a m sica ser reproduzida Modo BGM Humor Arquivo selecionado Aleat rio Voc pode selecionar um modo para a m sica de fundo Humor BGM En rgico Harm nico Triste Empolgante Calmo A m sica com o clima que voc selecionou definida como m sica de fundo Se voc definir Modo BGM como Humor poder selecionar um clima Selecione arquivo de m sica 0 arquivo s selecionados Somente o arquivo de m sica selecionado definido como m sica de fundo Se voc definir Modo BGM como Arquivo selecionado poder selecionar um arquivo de m sica O Configura o de imagem Configura o de som Voc pode selecionar as configura es de imagem e som Q Informa es As informa es do arquivo de foto s o exibidas Q Remover com seguran a Voc pode remover o dispositivo com seguran a da TV Portugu s 46 i Classifica o da lista de m sicas poss vel classificar a Lista de m sicas em uma ordem espec fica 1 Pressione o bot o MEDIA P 2 Pressione o bot o lt ou gt para selecionar Music e em seguida pressione ENTERLS 3 Pressione o bot o A para ir se o de chave de sele o Prefer ncia Pressione o bot o lt ou para selecionar um padr o de classifica o Visual B s T tulo Ar
26. Si o Je ee 5 Select Network Test to check the network connectivity Wireless Network Setup Manual Setup Wireless Network Setup 1 Set Network Type to Wireless Internet Protocol Setup Manual Setup 2 Select Wireless Network Setup ee 3 Set Internet Protocol Setup to Manual Setup IP Address 4 Setup IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway and DNS Server ce Press the number buttons on the remote control when you set the Network manually MM Select a network through Select a network a ae Select Network Test to check the network connectivity Oa English 36 INPUT SUPPORT il Input Menu Q Source List Use to select TV or other external input sources such as DVD Blu ray players Cable Box Satellite receivers Set Top Box connected to the TV Use to select the input source of your choice Press the SOURCE button on the remote control to view an external signal source A Source List Edit Name TV AV1 AV2 Component1 Component2 PC HDMI HDMI2 HDMI3 DVI HDMI4 IUSB 7 You can choose only those external devices that are connected to the TV In the Source List connected inputs will be highlighted and sorted to the top Inputs that are not connected Source List will be sorted to the bottom If USB devices are connected to the USB1 HDD and USB2 jacks they are displayed as USB1 and USB2 in order PC always stays activated Using the Color buttons on the remote with the Source list
27. The default PIN number of a new TV set is 0 0 0 0 You can change the PIN by selecting Change PIN from the menu The f symbol will be displayed and the channel will be locked Pal Timer Viewing If you reserve a program you want to watch the channel is automatically switched to the reserved channel in the Channel List even when you are watching another channel To reserve a program set the current time first refer to page 29 Only memorized channels can be reserved You can set the channel day month year hour and minute directly by pressing the number buttons on the remote control Reserving a program will be shown in the Programmed menu Digital Program Guide and Viewing Reservation When a digital channel is selected and you press the gt button the Program Guide for the channel appears You can reserve a program according to the procedures described above Channel Name Edit analog channels only Channels can labeled so that their call letters appear whenever the channel is selected The names of digital broadcasting channels are automatically assigned and cannot be labeled Select All Deselect All e Select All You can select all the channels in the channel list e Deselect All You can deselect all the selected channels You can only select Deselect All when there is a selected channel Auto Program For detailed procedures on using the Auto Program refer to page 15 Channel List Option Menu in Pro
28. a da SRS Labs Inc DO DOLBY Fabricado sob licen a de Dolby Laboratories Dolby e o s mbolo D duplo s o marcas comerciais da DIGITAL Dolby Laboratories Certificado por DivX para reprodu o de video DivX incluindo conte do premium O Precau es ao exibir uma imagem est tica Uma imagem est tica pode causar dano permanente em uma tela de TV N o exiba uma imagem est tica no painel LCD por mais de 2 horas pois isso poder causar reten o de imagem na tela Essa reten o de imagem tamb m conhecida como queima da tela Para evitar essa reten o de imagem reduza o grau de brilho e de contraste da tela ao exibir uma imagem est tica O fato de assistir a TV LCD no formato 4 3 por um longo per odo de tempo pode deixar tra os de bordas exibidos nas partes esquerda direita e central da tela causados pela diferen a da emiss o de luz na tela A utiliza o de e um DVD ou de um console de jogo pode causar um efeito similar na tela Danos provocados pelo efeito acima n o s o cobertos pela Garantia A exibi o de imagens est ticas de Video games e PC por mais tempo que um determinado per odo pode produzir p s imagens parciais Para evitar esse efeito reduza o brilho e o contraste ao exibir imagens est ticas 2009 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Todos os direitos reservados NDICE m Lista de fun es mAcess6rios m Visualizando o painel de controle m Visualizando o pa
29. mbolo w Pressione o bot o amarelo outra vez para cancelar uma sele o de arquivo e TOOLS Ferramentas Exibe os menus de op o O menu de op o muda de acordo com o status atual E Classifica o da lista de fotos poss vel classificar a lista de fotos em uma ordem espec fica 1 Pressione o bot o MEDIA P 2 Pressione o bot o lt ou gt para selecionar Photo e em seguida pressione ENTERLS x E E 7 Se SPA a Pressione o bot o A para ir se o de chave de sele o lt re os So o 0 226g 127 jpg pg tipo Pressione o bot o lt ou b para selecionar um padr o de classifica o Visual B s Cronograma Cor Pasta Prefer ncia As fotos s o classificadas de acordo com o novo padr o de classifica o selecionado 5 Pressione o bot o Y para ir se o de lista de arquivos Pressione o bot o Reproduzir ENTER C para iniciar o slide show na ordem selecionada Para navegar para o grupo anterior pr ximo pressione o bot o lt 44 REW ou gt gt FF As informa es da foto s o configuradas automaticamente As informa es de cores extra das de um arquivo de foto podem ser diferentes daquelas que voc espera Voc pode mudar a cor e prefer ncia O PTP n o suporta o modo de classifica o de pastas SUM Dispositivo Classificar Selecionar 4 Ferramentas D Retornar Q Visual Bas Mostra as pastas no disposi
30. o de reprodu o de m sica O Modo Repetir Ligado Desligado poss vel reproduzir arquivos de m sica repetidamente Ferramentas O Configura o de imagem Configura o de som Voc pode configurar os ajustes de imagem e som Mover 4b Ajustar Sair Q Informa es As informa es do arquivo de m sica s o exibidas Q Remover com seguran a Voc pode remover o dispositivo com seguran a da TV i Classificagao da lista de filmes E possivel classificar os filmes da lista de filmes em uma ordem especifica 1 Pressione o bot o MEDIA P 2 Pressione o bot o lt ou gt para selecionar Movie e em seguida pressione ENTERLS Pressione o bot o A para ir se o de chave de sele o Pressione o bot o lt ou gt para selecionar um padr o de classifica o Visual B s Cronograma T tulo Pasta Prefer ncia Os arquivos de filme s o classificados de acordo com o novo padr o de classifica o selecionado 5 Pressione o bot o gt Reproduzir ENTER Ls para reproduzir o filme na ordem selecionada As informa es do filme s o configuradas automaticamente Voc pode alterar a prefer ncia Classificar Selecionar 4 Ferramentas O Retornar Visual Bas Mostra as pastas no dispositivo de mem ria USB Se voc seleciona uma pasta e pressiona o bot o ENTER L lt somente os arquivos de filme contidos na pasta selecionada s o exibidos Quando classific
31. pode acessar conte do personalizado sem fazer um login adicional Quando ocorre um erro de rede n o consigo usar outros menus a n o ser o menu de configura o Se a conex o de rede n o funciona seu servi o pode estar limitado Isso porque todas as fun es exceto o menu de configura o s o necess rias para conectar a Internet H alguma possibilidade de ver filmes adultos no YouTube Basicamente na lista do menu eles s o filtrados Mas usando a fun o de busca eles podem ser mostrados Nesse caso usando a Galeria de widget bloqueie o servi o de widget E Site de ajuda Country Website Argentina www samsung com Consumidor televisores medi 2 0 gt Internet TV Brazil www samsung com Produtos gt TV medi 2 0 gt Internet DTV Chile www samsung com Consumidor televisores medi 2 0 gt Internet TV Colombia www samsung com Productos television gt medi 2 0 gt Internet TV Latin www samsung com Productos televisores medi 2 0 gt Internet TV Peru www samsung com Consumidor televisores medi 2 0 gt Internet TV A fase de acesso pode ser alterada futuramente Pode haver links diferentes para pa ses especiais Portugu s 70 WIDGETS TERRA Adicionalmente pela galeria de widgets poss vel instalar os servi os com conte do provido pelo Terra ill Widget Previsao do Tempo Sua TV permite a visualiza o de
32. pode gravar as transmiss es de origem selecionando Gravando device name Se voc pressionar o bot o e ser gravado o que voc estiver assistindo atualmente Ao assistir um video a partir de um outro dispositivo o v deo do dispositivo gravado 2 Antes de gravar verifique se a tomada da antena est corretamente conectada ao dispositivo de grava o Para conectar uma antena corretamente a um dispositivo de grava o consulte o manual do usu rio de dispositivos de grava o Mover Entrar O Retornar E Ouvir atrav s do receiver home theater poss vel ouvir o som atrav s de um receiver em vez dos alto falantes da TV 1 Pressione o bot o TOOLS Pressione o bot o ENTER 4 para selecionar Anynet Arnet HDMI CEC VerTV amp r E s Lista de dispositivos Pressione o bot o A ou Y para selecionar Receiver Pressione o bot o lt ou gt para Grava o DVDR j i i DVDR MENU selecionar Ligado ou Desligado nes Pressione o bot o EXIT para sair J Se o seu receiver suporta apenas udio ele pode n o aparecer na lista de dispositivos O receiver ir funcionar quando voc tiver conectado corretamente o conector ptico Mover 3 Entrar O Retornar do receiver ao conector DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL da TV Quanto o receiver home theater estiver ajustado em On ligado voc poder ouvir a reprodu o de som pelo conector ptico da TV Quando a TV estiver exibindo um
33. the alarm window appears up to three times at 5 minute intervals You can configure the viewing settings for the text message SMS contents on the mobile phone For the procedures refer to the mobile phone manual Some special characters may be displayed as blank or broken characters Call Arrival Alarm If a call arrives while you are watching TV the alarm window appears e Ifyou select the OK button the call arrival alarm is confirmed and the alarm window is closed e Ifyou select the Cancel button the alarm window appears up to three times at 5 minute intervals Schedule Alarm While you are watching TV the alarm window appears to display the registered schedule e Ifyou select the OK button you can view the contents of the schedule registered on the mobile phone e If you select the Cancel button the alarm window appears up to three times at 5 minute intervals You can configure the viewing settings for the schedule contents on the mobile phone For the procedures refer to the mobile phone manual Some special characters may be displayed as blank or broken characters English 76 al Using the Media Function An alarm window appears informing the user that the media contents videos photos music sent from the mobile phone will be displayed on the TV The contents are played automatically 3 seconds after the alarm window appears If you press the RETURN or EXIT button when the al
34. vel pode precisar da instala o de softwares adicionais Para mais detalhes consulte o manual de usu rio do produto Conectando ao Centro de rede dom stica Para mais informa es sobre configura es de rede consulte as p ginas 33 a 35 e Conex o a uma rede sem fio ad hoc 1 Conecte o Adaptador de rede sem fio Samsung porta USB1 HDD ou USB2 da TV Painel lateral da TV Telefone celular f Sjj z E Gar Adaptador de rede sem fio ou LAN Samsung ou llr z H E S E Eg j 2 Para mais informa es sobre como configurar uma rede ad hoc consulte a p gina 35 Para mais informa es sobre como definir as configura es de rede do celular consulte o manual do celular 3 Configure o endere o IP SSID e senha do telefone celular nas Configura es ad hoc do telefone celular utilizando o Nome de rede SSID e a Chave de seguran a senha exibidos na TV e Conex o atrav s de um compartilhador de IP com sem fio 1 Conecte a porta LAN da TV e o compartilhador de IP com sem fio usando o cabo de rede ou conecte a porta USB1 HDD ou USB2 da TV e o Adaptador de rede sem fio Samsung Z Para os procedimentos sobre a configura o do compartilhador com sem fio e do telefone celular consulte o manual do dispositivo correspondente
35. 0 0 Se voc esquecer sua senha pressione os bot es do controle remoto na sequ ncia a seguir para restaurar sua senha inicial 0 0 0 0 POWER Desligado MUTE 8 2 4 POWER Ligado O Restri o de Programas Este recurso permite que voc impe a que usu rios n o autorizados como crian as assistam programas inadequados por meio de uma senha N mero de identifica o pessoal de 4 d gitos definido por voc Antes da tela de configura o aparecer a tela de entrada do n mero PIN aparecer Digite sua senha atual de 4 d gitos A senha padr o de uma TV nova 0 0 0 0 Voc poder alterar a senha selecionando Mudar Senha no menu Quando as classifica es Indicativas est o definidas o s mbolo fg exibido Perm Tudo Pressione para desbloquear todas as classifica es de programa o da TV Bloq Tudo Pressione para bloquear todas as classifica es de programa o da TV Q Melodia Desligada Baixa M dia Alta poss vel fazer com que uma melodia seja tocada quando a TV for ligada ou desligada A melodia n o reproduzida Quando a TV n o emite nenhum som porque o bot o MUTE foi pressionado Quando a TV n o emitir nenhum som porque o volume foi reduzido ao n vel m nimo com o bot o VOL Quando a TV desligada pela fun o Sleep Timer Q Economia de Energia Desligada Baixa M dia Alta Autom tico Este recurso ajusta o brilho da TV para reduzir o consumo de ener
36. 2 E Viewing the Control Panel Z The product color and shape may vary depending on the model The front panel buttons can be activated by touching them with your finger SOURCE MENU VOL vV CHA O POWER Press to turn the TV on and off O POWER INDICATOR Blinks and turns off when the power is on and lights up in stand by mode O V CH A Press to change channels In the onscreen menu use the VW CH A buttons as you would use the Y and A buttons on the remote control voL Press to increase or decrease the volume In the on screen menu use the VOL buttons as you would use the lt and gt buttons on the remote control MENU Press to see an on screen menu of your TV s features O SOURCE 4 Toggles between all the available input sources In the on screen menu use this button as you use the ENTERLS button on the remote control REMOTE CONTROL SENSOR Aim the remote control towards this spot on the TV O SPEAKERS English 3 E Viewing the Connection Panel TV Side Panel TV Rear Panel 2 3 4 12 DVILIN HDMI IN AUDIO HDMI IN DVI IN 3 Y NI INAH q AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL REET d COMPONENT IN Power Input 2 ooo ooo The product color and shape may vary depending on the model HDMI IN 1 2 3 DVI IN 4 DVI IN AUDIO Connects to the HDMI jack of a device with an
37. 363 60 004 65 000 l 1024 x 768 56 476 70 069 75 000 l 1024 x 768 60 023 75 029 78 750 VESA DMT 1152 x 864 67 500 75 000 108 000 1280 x 1024 63 981 60 020 108 000 1280 x 1024 79 976 75 025 135 000 1280 x 800 49 702 59 810 83 500 1280 x 800 62 795 74 934 106 500 1280 x 960 60 000 60 000 108 000 1360 x 768 47 712 60 015 85 500 1440 x 900 55 935 59 887 106 500 1440 x 900 70 635 74 984 136 750 1680 x 1050 65 290 59 954 146 250 l 1280 x 720 52 500 70 000 89 040 VESAGTF 1280 x 1024 74 620 70 000 128 943 y VESA DMT DTV CEA 1920 x 1080p 67 500 60 000 148 500 i Setting up the TV with your PC Preset Press the SOURCE button to select PC mode O Auto Adjustment Use the Auto Adjust function to have the TV automatically adjust the video signals it receives Brightness The function also automatically fine tunes the settings and adjusts the frequency values and positions E mh Auto Adjustment Z Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu You can also set the Auto Adjustment aap by selecting Tools Auto Adjustment frias Options Picture Reset This function does not work in DVI Digital mode Q Screen Coarse Fine The purpose of picture quality adjustment is to remove or reduce picture noise If the noise is cam not removed by Fine tuning alone then adjust the frequency as best as possible Coarse and Coa Fine tune again After the noise has been re
38. Agree para aceitar o acordo Atela Statistics amp Analysis exibida Selecione Agree para aceitar o acordo i Configura o do Internet TV Voc pode verificar e usar os menus relativos a Single Sign On SSO gerenciamento de sistema e propriedades Pressione o bot o A ou Y para selecionar Setup e em seguida pressione ENTER Ls Q Single Sign On Voc pode usar esse menu ao criar excluir a conta Usando o Single Sign On voc pode controlar sua conta incluindo as informa es de conta do site de conte do Voc n o precisa de um log in adicional A conta serve apenas para o internet TV Criar conta Voc pode criar uma conta e ser conectado ao site de servi o desejado A conta ser feita em menos de 10 minutos O n mero limite de caracteres da conta 10 Se n o houver servi o que preciso de log in voc n o pode criar uma conta Gerenciamento de conta e Service Site Voc pode registrar as informa es de login do site de servi o como o YouTube por exemplo Change Password Muda a senha da sua conta Delete Exclui a conta Se esquecer a senha da sua conta pressione os bot es do controle remoto na sequ ncia a seguir para restaurar as configura es do Internet TV POWER ligado gt MUTE gt 9 gt 4 gt 8 POWER desligado Se voc usar essa fun o todas as contas ser o exclu das Portugu s 68 O Configura o de sistema Ticker Autorun Ticker Duration podem n o ser supo
39. Bloquear Canal Atual ou Desbloquear Canal Atual Esta fun o estar dispon vel somente quando Bloqueio Crian as estiver configurado como Ligado consulte a p gina 28 A tela de entrada da senha aparecer Digite sua senha de 4 d gitos A senha padr o de uma TV nova 0 0 0 0 poss vel alterar o PIN selecionando Mudar Senha no menu O s mbolo fm ser exibido e o canal ser bloqueado ty SSS Visualiza o com temporizador Caso voc reserve um programa que deseja assistir o canal ser mudado automaticamente para o canal reservado na Lista de canais mesmo que esteja assistindo outro canal Para reservar um programa primeiro necess rio definir o hor rio atual consulte a p gina 29 Z Apenas canais memorizados podem ser reservados poss vel ajustar diretamente canal m s dia ano hora e minuto pressionando as teclas num ricas do controle remoto A reserva de um programa ser exibida no menu Programado Guia de programa o digital e Visualiza o de reservas Quando um canal digital selecionado e voc pressiona o bot o b o Guia de programa o desse canal ser exibido poss vel reservar um programa de acordo com os procedimentos descritos acima 5 5 5 Edi o do nome do canal apenas para canais anal gicos poss vel dar nomes aos canais para que seus prefixos sejam exibidos sempre que o canal for selecionado Os nomes de canais de transmiss o digital recebem seus pre
40. EXIT pressionado por um tempo As configura es do produto s o reconfiguradas para o padr o de f brica O painel TFT LCD usa um painel com subpixels 6 220 800 que exige uma tecnologia sofisticada para produzir Entretanto pode haver poucos pixels luminosos ou escuros na tela Esses pixels n o causar o nenhum impacto no desempenho do produto E Instala o do suporte Predefini o Encaixe o suporte de guia e o gargalo da tampa no suporte e aperte usando parafusos Aplic vel somente a modelos de 32 polegadas 1 Fixe a sua TV LCD no suporte Duas ou mais pessoas devem carregar a TV Certifique se de distinguir a parte frontal e posterior do suporte ao mont lo Para certificar se de que a TV est instalada no suporte e nivelada corretamente n o aplique press o excessiva na parte superior esquerda das laterais direita da TV 2 Aperte os parafusos na posi o e ent o aperte os parafusos na posi o O Levante o produto e aperte os parafusos Se voc apertar os parafusos sem levantar a TV LCD ela poder inclinar para um lado i Desconectar a base 1 Remova os quatro parafusos da parte traseira da TV 2 Separe o suporte da TV Duas ou mais pessoas devem carregar a TV 3 Feche o furo inferior com a tampa Portugu s 78 Montagem dos cabos Encaixe os cabos no cabo holder wire para que nao fiquem visiveis atrav s do suporte transparente E Espe
41. Ferramentas Programado Exibe toda a programa o atual reservada Selecione um canal na tela Todos os Canais Canais Adicionados ou Favorito pressionando os bot es A Y e em seguida o bot o ENTER L lt Ent o ser poss vel assistir o canal selecionado 2 Uso dos bot es coloridos com a Lista de Canais Vermelho Antena Alterna entre Ar ou Cabo Verde Zoom Amplia ou diminui o n mero de um canal Amarelo Selecionar Seleciona v rias listas de canais poss vel realizar as fun es adicionar excluir ou adicionar aos Favoritos excluir dos Favoritos para v rios canais ao mesmo tempo Selecione os canais desejados e pressione o bot o amarelo para definir todos os canais selecionados ao mesmo tempo A indica o w ser exibida esquerda dos canais selecionados TOOLS Ferramentas Exibe os menus Adicionar ou Apagar Adicionar a Favoritos ou Excluir de Favoritos Bloquear ou Desbloqueio Visual temp Edi o do nome do canal Selecionar Tudo ou Desmarcar Tudo e Prog Autom tica os menus de op o podem ser diferentes dependendo da situa o cones de exibi o de status de canal ev um canal selecionado pressionando o bot o amarelo e um programa sendo transmitido no momento e Y um canal definido como Favorito e um programa reservado f um canal bloqueado Menu de op es de Lista de Canais em Todos os Canais Canais Adicionados Favorito Z Pressione o bo
42. HDD USB2 Connector for software upgrades and Media Play etc You can connect to Samsung s network wirelessly using the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter Sold separately For USB HDD use the USB1 HDD port E Remote Control You can use the remote control up to a distance of about 23 feet from the TV The performance of the remote control may be affected by bright light The product color and shape may vary depending on the model O POWER Turns the TV on and off NUMERIC BUTTONS Press to change the channel O Z Press to select additional channels digital being broadcast by the same station For example to select channel 54 3 press 54 then press and 8 O MUTE x Press to temporarily cut off the sound O voL Press to increase or decrease the volume O CH LIST Used to display Channel Lists on the screen TOOLS Use to quickly select frequently used functions O INTERNET Press to use various internet services to view useful information and entertaining content COLOR BUTTONS Use these buttons in the Channel list Internet TV Media Play menu etc MEDIA P Allows you to play music files pictures and movies INFO Press to display information on the TV screen Use these buttons in the Media Play and Anynet modes Le This remote can be used to control recording on Samsung recorders with the Anynett feature TV Select
43. Internet TV service In a widget that provides multiple category menus you can view the contents of the category menus using the lt and gt buttons Account Login 1 Press the Red button 2 Select desired User account then press the ENTER button 3 Input the password When login succeeds User account will be displayed on the screen Before login at least one and more account should be registered If you want to create account refer to Setting up Internet TV Using the Widget Gallery You can use Run Service Lock Install Service at the existing widget and you can see description of the widget service that isn t installed On the Internet TV you can add and use various widgets provided by service provider It may vary according to contents provider e Run Service Runs the widget service e Lock Set the service lock e Install Service or Delete Service Install or delete widget service Using the YouTube Widget You can watch the movie provided by YouTube If you have the account in YouTube Register account information using Account management Then you can use My Favourites category HINES The menu can be changed by web service mer ee ane There may be inappropriate contents for child In this case use Lock function in tt Widget Gallery Most Linked Most Respomded Featured English 70 al Troubleshooting for internet TV Problem Possible Solution Some widget services do not work
44. L jacks on the TV and the AUDIO OUT jacks on the DVD Blu ray player Cable Box Satellite receiver Set Top Box 4 Component video separates the video into Y Luminance brightness Pb Blue and Pr Red for enhanced video quality Be sure to match the component video and audio connections For example if connecting a Component video cable to COMPONENT IN 1 connect the audio cable to COMPONENT IN 1 also Each DVD Blu ray player Cable Box Satellite receiver Set Top Box has a different back panel configuration When connecting a DVD Blu ray player Cable Box Satellite receiver Set Top Box match the color of the connection terminal to the cable il Connecting a Camcorder The side panel jacks on your TV make it easy to connect a camcorder to your TV They allow you to view the camcorder tapes without using a VCR S amp S TV Side Panel crm Video Cable Not supplied Audio Cable Not supplied 1 Connect a Video Cable between the AV IN 2 VIDEO jack on the TV and the VIDEO OUT jack on the camcorder 2 Connect Audio Cables between the AV IN 2 R AUDIO L jacks on the TV and the AUDIO OUT jacks on the camcorder Each Camcorder has a different back panel configuration When connecting a Camcorder match the color of the connection terminal to the cable English 9 Connecting a VCR TV Side Panel TV Rear Panel VCR Rear Panel Video Cable Not supp
45. Legal Notices to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that 1 displays an appropriate copyright notice and 2 tells the user that there is no warranty for the work except to the extent that warranties are provided that licensees may convey the work under this License and how to view a copy of this License If the interface presents a list of user commands or options such as a menu a prominent item in the list meets this criterion f Source Code The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it Object code means any non source form of a work A Standard Interface means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body or in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language one that is widely used among developers working in that language The System Libraries of an executable work include anything other than the work as a whole that a is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component but which is not part of that Major Component and b serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form A Major Component in this context means a major essential component kernel window system and so on of the specific operating system
46. Media Play USB amp DLNA e em seguida pressione o bot o ENTER Ls O menu Media Play USB amp DLNA exibido Photo Music Movie Setup SUM Dispositivo D Retornar Pressione o bot o MEDIA P no controle remoto para exibir o menu Media Play Pressione o bot o SOURCE no controle remoto para visualizar a lista de fontes Em seguida pressione o bot o A or Y para selecionar USB 3 Pressione o bot o vermelho em seguida pressione o bot o A ou Y para selecionar a mem ria da TV ou mem ria USB Pressione o bot o ENTER L Esta fun o difere dependendo da mem ria da TV mem ria do dispositivo e RP USB dispositivo DLNA Z a dad O nome do dispositivo USB selecionado aparece na parte inferior esquerda Sar da tela 4 Pressione o bot o lt ou gt para selecionar um icone Photo Music Movie Setup e em seguida pressione ENTER C Para sair do modo Media Play pressione o bot o MEDIA P no controle remoto Remover um dispositivo USB com seguran a Voc pode remover o dispositivo com seguran a da TV 1 Pressione o bot o TOOLS na tela de lista de arquivos do Media Play ou enquanto uma apresenta o de slides m sica ou filme estiver sendo reproduzido 2 Pressione o bot o A ou Y para selecionar Remover com seguran a e em seguida pressione o bot o ENTER Ls 3 Remova o dispositivo USB da TV Portugu s 41 Exibi o na tela emma Se o de chave de sele o E Se
47. Nitidez 50 Cor 50 Matiz Vd Vm Vd50 Vm50 Configura es Avan adas Op es de imagem 6 Pressione o bot o lt ou gt para reduzir ou aumentar o valor de um item espec fico As a s f Luz de Fundo 7 etapas para ajuste de Menu podem ser diferentes dependendo do menu selecionado Mover 4b Ajustar C Entrar 5 Retornar cone de ajuda 7 Pressione o bot o ENTER Ls para concluir a configura o Pressione o bot o EXIT para AS sair ER Art Portugu s 13 H Recurso Plug amp Play Quando a TV for ligada os ajustes b sicos ser o realizados de maneira autom tica e sequencial Gs 1 POWER Pressione o bot o POWER no controle remoto Tamb m poss vel usar o bot o POWER da TV Di A mensagem Selecione o idioma do menu ser exibida Pressione o bot o ENTER Pressione o bot o A ou Y para selecionar o idioma e em seguida pressione ENTER L gl A mensagem Selecione Casa ao instalar a TV em sua casa ser exibida Plug amp Play Selecione o idioma do menu Idioma Portugu s Pressione o bot o lt ou gt para selecionar Loja ou Casa e ent o pressione ENTER Ls A mensagem Selecione a antena para memorizar ser exibida Recomendamos que a TV seja configurada no modo Home Use para a melhor imagem em sua casa Store Demo serve apenas para uso em ambiente de vendas Se o televisor for acidentalmente configurado para o modo Loja e voc qu
48. Ps Pr da TV e as entradas COMPONENT Y Ps Pr do DVD Blu ray player Decodificador Receptor de sat lite Set Top Box 2 Conecte os cabos de udio entre as entradas COMPONENT IN 1 ou 2 R AUDIO L da TV e as entradas AUDIO OUTdo DVD Blu ray player Decodificador Receptor de sat lite Set Top Box O V deo Componente separa o v deo em Y lumin ncia brilho Pb azul e Pr vermelho para obter uma qualidade de v deo superior Verifique se as conex es de V deo Componente e udio s o iguais Por exemplo se conectar um cabo V deo Componente em COMPONENT IN 1 conecte o cabo de udio tamb m em COMPONENT IN 1 Cada DVD Blu ray player Decodificador Receptor de sat lite Set Top Box possui uma configura o de painel traseiro diferente Ao conectar um DVD Blu ray player Decodificador Receptor de sat lite Set Top Box use um terminal de conex o com a mesma cor do cabo i Conectando uma filmadora As entradas do painel lateral na TV facilitam a conex o de uma filmadora com a sua TV Elas permitem que voc visualize as fitas da filmadora sem utilizar um v deo cassete Painel lateral da TV cD O Cabo de video n o fornecido ras AUDIO OUT o Cabo de udio n o fornecido 1 Conecte um cabo de v deo entre a entrada AV IN 2 VIDEO da TV e a sa da VIDEO OUT da camcorder 2 Conecte os cabos de udio entre as entradas AV IN 2 R AUDIO L da TV e
49. Red Refresh Refreshes the connected external devices Press this if your Source is on and connected but does not appear in the list Refresh 2 Tools TOOLS Tools Displays the Edit Name and Information menus s amp s Q Edit Name VCR DVD Cable STB Satellite STB PVR STB AV Receiver Game Camcorder PC DVI DVI PC TV IPTV Blu ray 1 HD DVD DMA Name the device connected to the input jacks to make your input source selection easier When a PC with a resolution of 1920 x 1080 60Hz is connected to the HDMI IN3 DVI IN port you should set the HDMI3 DVI mode to DVI PC in the Edit Name of the Input mode E Support Menu Q Product Guide The Product Guide gives you information on the most important features of this TV Picture Quality Full HD 1080p m Auto Motion Plus 120Hz Modo de Imagem Samsung Media2 0 Internet TV Content Service m Content Library Flash m USB2 0 Movie DLNA Wireless Eco Friendly Energy Saving Mode Eco Material 2 Product Guide yoddng Using the Remote Control Buttons in the Product Guide Menu Button Operations Yellow Button Shows the contents of the Product Guide sequentially Auto Play lt gt Move the cursor and select an item ENTERCS Select the currently selected item RETURN Return to the previous menu EXIT Stop the current function and return to the Product Guide main menu
50. TV It may not be viewed normally For more information on how how to configure your country refer to the Plug amp Play Feature instructions You may experience slow operation or hesitation when using this function due to network conditions Before using Internet TV set up the network first For more information on how to configure your network refer to Setting the Network When running Internet TV for the first time the basic settings proceed automatically It may take few minutes to update 1 2 Press the MENU button Press the A or Y button to select Application then press the ENTER L lt button Press the A or Y button to select Internet TV then press the ENTER Ls button amp Press the Internet button on the remote control to display the Internet TV menu The User Agreement is displayed Select Agree to accept the agreement The Statistics amp Analysis is displayed Select Agree to accept the agreement E Setting up Internet TV You can check and use the menus regarding Single Sign On SSO system management and properties Press the A or Y button to select Setup then press the ENTER Ls button Q Single Sign On You can use this menu when creating deleting the account Using the Single Sign On you can control your account including contents site s account information You don t need additional log in Account is only for internet OTV Create Account You can create account and be linked
51. a desk or a heavy stationary object English 81 i Securing the Installation Space Keep the required distances between the product and other objects e g walls to ensure proper ventilation Failing to do so may result in fire or a problem with the product due to an increase in the internal temperature of the product Install the product so the required distances shown in the figure are kept When using a stand or wall mount use parts provided by Samsung Electronics only e f you use parts provided by another manufacturer it may result in a problem with the product or an injury due to the product falling e If you use parts provided by another manufacturer it may result in a problem with the product or fire due to an increase in the internal temperature of the product due to poor ventilation The appearance may differ depending on the product When installing the product with a stand When installing the product with a wall mount ss tem PE toom i 10 cm i 10 cm 10 cm i j 10 cm A LAs LZ i i 10 cm il Securing the TV to the Wall Caution Pulling pushing or climbing on the TV may cause the TV to fall In particular ensure your children do N not hang over or destabilize the TV doing so may cause the TV to tip over causing serious injuries or death Follow all safety precautions provided on the included Safety Flyer Fo
52. a set of headphones to your set if you wish to watch a TV program without disturbing other people in the room Using the sound function is restricted when connecting headphones to the TV Prolonged use of headphones at a high volume may damage your hearing You will not hear sound from the speakers when you connect headphones to the TV The headphone volume and TV volume are adjusted separately English 26 SETUP E Setup Menu Q Language You can set the menu language Plug amp Play Language English Time Time For detailed procedures on setting up options refer to the Setting the Time instructions refer Caption to pages 29 30 Q Game Mode Off On When connecting to a game console such as PlayStation or Xbox you can enjoy a more realistic gaming experience by selecting the game menu Restrictions on game mode Caution To disconnect the game console and connect another external device set Game Mode to Off in the setup menu If you display the TV menu in Game Mode the screen shakes slightly Game Mode is not available in regular TV and PC mode While PIP is in operation the Game Mode function cannot be used If the picture is poor when external device is connected to TV check if Game Mode is On Set Game Mode to Off and connect external devices If Game Mode is On Picture mode is automatically changed to Standard and cannot be changed Sound mode is automatically chang
53. as sa das AUDIO OUT da filmadora Cada filmadora possui uma configura o diferente do painel traseiro Ao conectar uma filmadora use um terminal de conex o com a mesmo cor do cabo Portugu s 9 Ligar um video cassete Painel lateral da TV Painel traseiro da TV video cassete O Cabo de video n o fornecido Cabo de udio n o fornecido 1 Conecte um cabo de v deo entre a entrada AV IN 1 ou 2 VIDEO da TV e a sa da VIDEO OUT do v deo cassete 2 Conecte os cabos de udio entre as sa das AV IN 1 ou 2 R AUDIO L da TV e as entradas AUDIO OUT do v deo cassete Se voc possui um v deo cassete mono n o est reo use um conector Y n o fornecido para conect lo s entradas de entrada de udio direita e esquerda da TV Outra op o a conex o do cabo ao conector R Se o seu VCR for est reo conecte dois cabos Cada VCR possui uma configura o diferente do painel traseiro Ao conectar um VCR use um terminal de conex o com a mesmo cor do cabo Conex o de um sistema udio digital As entradas do painel traseiro na TV facilitam a conex o de um sistema udio digital home theater receptor sua TV Sistema udio digital o Painel traseiro da TV O Ta O Cabo ptico n o fornecido 1 Conecte o cabo ptico entre a sa da DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL da TV e a entrada Digital Audio Input do sistema udio digital Quando um siste
54. button You can play the selected content item or copy it to the TV memory Pp So no gt eo al So Setup e Screen Saver Run Time Select to set the waiting time before the screen saver appears e Save UDN Saves the UDN number to a USB device An NTFS format USB storage device does not support saving UDN We recommend using a FAT format USB storage device English 68 INTERNET TV This function may not be supported depending on your country Not available in all locations If you have some problems while using a widget service please contact to service provider In the widget press the green button and get contact information or refer to help website for service provider information English may be only supported in widget service depending on region E Getting Started with Internet TV Internet TV provides SAMSUNG s widget services through a network connection Internet TV contents can be changed depending on contents provider You can access various information such as YouTube through the Internet TV service The configuration of Widgets and their provided services may differ according to the selected country After changing country turn off and on the TV Then you can use widget service supported changed country If Country is set to Others TV can t recognize your country In this case please select directly from the service country list If a certain content s font provided by contents provider is not supported on
55. content item and press the ENTER button You can play or delete the selected content item USB You can check the content saved on the USB device for each subitem of the Content Library e Select a content item and press the ENTER L lt button You can play the selected content item or copy it to the TV memory Content Library only supports USB Mass Storage Class devices MSC MSC is a Mass Storage Class Bulk Only Transport device Examples of MSC are Thumb drives and Flash Card Readers Playing a game using an external USB memory device will allow you to save your game depending on the game Take care as removing the USB memory device while saving data to the USB memory device may cause the data to be lost English 67 Downloading New Contents New content other than the built in content will be provided via the Samsung com website free of charge When you download the paid contents you need UDN number to download contents Check the UDN number before downloading a new content item e Downloading Content Visit the www samsung com website Select a content item in the Contents Download page Download the contents onto the USB memory device Go to Content Library main menu by pressing CONTENT button or choosing Content Library Menu gt Application Content Library Plug the USB memory into USB port on the side of the TV You can see the content sub item which you downloaded Select a content item and press the enter
56. either 1 cause the Corresponding Source to be so available or 2 arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work or 3 arrange in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License to extend the patent license to downstream recipients Knowingly relying means you have actual knowledge that but for the patent license your conveying the covered work in a country or your recipient s use of the covered work in a country would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid If pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement you convey or propagate by procuring conveyance of a covered work and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use propagate modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it A patent license is discriminatory if it does not include within the scope of its coverage prohibits the exercise of or is conditioned on the non exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your
57. exibido nome dispositivo INFO Exibe o menu de reprodu o do dispositivo conectado Por exemplo se um gravador de DVD estiver conectado o menu de reprodu o do gravador de DVD ser exibido Grava o gravador Inicia a grava o imediatamente utilizando o gravador Somente dispon vel em dispositivos que possuem suporte fun o de grava o Parar grava o gravador P ra a grava o Receiver O udio reproduzido pelo receiver Caso exista mais de um dispositivo conectado eles ser o exibidos como gravador e no caso de somente um dispositivo ele ser representado como nome dispositivo Portugu s 62 Bot es do controle remoto da TV dispon veis no modo Anynett Tipo de dispositivo Estado de funcionamento Bot es dispon veis Dispositivo Anynet Ap s mudar para o dispositivo quando o Teclas num ricas A V 4 D menu do dispositivo correspondente exibido ENTERLS na tela Bot es de cor Bot o EXIT Ap s mudar para o dispositivo durante a lt Procura para tr s Procura reprodu o de um arquivo para frente m Parar gt Reproduzir un Pausar Dispositivo com sintonizador Depois de mudar para o dispositivo quando V CHA interno se est assistindo um programa de TV Dispositivo de udio Quando o receiver est ativado VOL bot o MUTE A fun o Anynet somente
58. expects or is expected to use the product A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial industrial or non consumer uses unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product Installation Information for a User Product means any methods procedures authorization keys or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made If you convey an object code work under this section in or with or specifically for use in a User Product and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term regardless of how the transaction is characterized the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product for example the work has been installed in ROM The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service warranty or up
59. fio Samsung ao terminal USB1 HDD ou USB2 da TV be e 8S SS cs necess rio usar o Adaptador de rede sem fio Samsung WISO9ABGN para usar uma rede wireless O adaptador de rede sem fio Samsung vendido separadamente O adaptador de rede sem fio WISO9ABGN oferecido pelas melhores lojas sites de com rcio eletr nico e pela Samsungparts com Para usar uma rede sem fio sua TV deve estar conectada a um distribuidor de IP sem fio Caso o distribuidor de IP sem fio ofere a suporte a DHCP sua TV pode usar endere o IP est tico ou DHCP para se conectar rede sem fio O adaptador de rede sem fio da Samsung oferece suporte a IEEE 802 11A IEEE 802 11B IEEE 802 11G IEEE 802 11N Ao reproduzir um v deo DLNA em uma conex o IEEE 802 11B G o v deo pode n o ser reproduzido com fluidez Caso o distribuidor de IP sem fio permita que voc ligue desligue a fun o de conex o Ping ligue a Selecione um canal para o distribuidor de IP sem fio que n o est sendo usado no momento Caso o canal definido para o distribuidor de IP sem fio esteja sendo usado por outro dispositivo pr ximo no momento isso resultar em interfer ncia e pode ocorrer uma falha na comunica o Caso voc aplique um sistema de seguran a n o inclu do na lista abaixo ele n o funcionar com a TV Ao aplicar a chave de seguran a para o AP distribuidor de IP sem fio apenas os seguintes s o suportados 1 Modo de autentica o ABERTO COMPARTILHADO WPA
60. funciona quando a fonte ativa no controle remoto estiver ajustada para TV O bot o e funciona somente enquanto estiver no estado de grava o N o poss vel controlar dispositivos Anynet usando os bot es da TV S poss vel controlar dispositivos Anynet com o controle remoto da TV O controle remoto da TV pode n o funcionar em determinadas condi es Caso isso ocorra selecione o dispositivo Anynet novamente As fun es Anynet n o funcionam com produtos de outros fabricantes SS e SBS As opera es lt lt gt gt podem ser diferentes dependendo do dispositivo il Gravagao Vo c pode gravar um programa da TV usando um gravador Samsung Pressione o bot o TOOLS Pressione o bot o ENTER Cs para selecionar Anynet Agner HDMI CEC en Pressione o bot o A ou Y para selecionar Gravar imediatamente e em seguida C pressione ENTER A grava o tem in cio umam Quando houver mais de um dispositivo de grava o Receiver Desligado Configura o Quando h v rios dispositivos de grava o conectados os dispositivos de grava o s o listados Pressione o bot o A ou Y para selecionar um dispositivo de grava o e em seguida pressione ENTER L sl A grava o tem in cio Quando o dispositivo de grava o n o for exibido selecione Lista de Dispositivos e pressione o bot o vermelho para procurar dispositivos Pressione o bot o EXIT para sair 7 Voc
61. function differs depending on the TV Memory USB Memory Device DLNA device CHA E Copy The selected USB device name appears at the bottom left of the screen po 4 Press the lt or gt button to select an icon Photo Music Movie Setup then press the ENTER LS button To exit Media Play mode press the MEDIA P button on the remote control Removing a USB Memory Device Safely You can remove the device safely from the TV 1 Press the TOOLS button in the Media Play file list screen or while a Slide Show music or movie is being played 2 Press the A or Y button to select Safe Remove then press the ENTER LS button 3 Remove the USB device from the TV English 41 Screen Display Color Folder Basic View Timeline 3 Sort key List Section Group List Section File List Section o Move to either Sort key List Section Group List Section or File List Section using the Up and Down buttons After selecting a section press the lt or gt buttons to select an item O Current Sort key This field shows the current standard for sorting files Press the lt or gt button to change the standard for sorting files View Groups Shows the detailed groups of the files sorted according the selected Sort key The sort group where the currently selected file is contained is highlighted Currently selected file The selected file is the file you can now control Photo and movie files are displaye
62. lt Method 1 gt lt Method 2 gt lt Method 3 gt E SAMSUNG PC Stare erage JERI SAMSUNG P Share araga TE seneuna Pc Shae Noregs Applying the Current Settings Perform this when synchronization is necessary due to a new shared folder or cancelling a shared folder The Set Changed State menu applies changes to shared folders to the data saved with the PC share programme Since applying changes to the internal data is a time consuming process this function enables users to apply changes to the data only when required Until the Set Changed State menu is selected the changed state of the shared folder is not applied to the server Changes to the shared folders are not applied to your PC until you select the Set Changed State menu e Method 1 Select the Share menu and select the Refresh DB sub menu e Method 2 Click the Set Changed State icon lt Method 1 gt lt Method 2 gt E Sansuna PC Sare erage TE Sasun P Share anager me Me Sm Sener Ho Seve Meda Ply Pose ane as DES sua Meda Ply PESE E Set Secuy Fey English 60 Setting the Access Permission To enable the TV to find your PC the TV must be set to Set Device Policy in the Access Permission Settings window In addition the PC server and the TV must be on the same subnet Method Select the Share menu and select Set Device Policy Rejected items are represented in gray You can change the
63. o de lista de grupo Se o de lista de arquivos 1236jpg 1237 ipa V para Se o de chave de sele o Se o de lista de grupo ou Se o de lista de arquivos usando os bot es para cima e para baixo Ap s selecionar uma se o pressione os bot es lt ou gt para selecionar um item O Chave de sele o atual Este campo mostra o padr o atual para classifica o de arquivos Pressione o bot o lt ou gt para modificar o padr o de classifica o dos arquivos Visualizar grupos Mostra os grupos detalhados dos arquivos classificados de acordo com a chave de sele o escolhida O grupo de sele o que inclui o arquivo selecionado destacado Arquivo atual selecionado O arquivo selecionado o arquivo que voc pode controlar agora Arquivos de foto e de filme s o exibidos como imagens em miniatura Dispositivo atual Exibe o nome do dispositivo atual selecionado Pressione o bot o vermelho para selecionar um dispositivo e Bot o vermelho Dispositivo Seleciona um dispositivo conectado Informa es de sele o de itens Exibe o n mero de arquivos de m sica selecionados ao se pressionar o bot o amarelo Itens de ajuda e Bot o verde Classificar Modifica a configura o de favoritos do arquivo selecionado Pressione este bot o repetidamente at que o valor desejado seja exibido e Bot o amarelo Selecionar Seleciona um arquivo da lista de arquivos Arquivos selecionados s o marcados com um s
64. o de mensagens m Utiliza o da fun o de m dia RECOMENDA ES E Solu o de problemas m Instala o do suporte m Desconectar a base m Montagem dos cabos m Especifica es do kit de montagem na parede VESA m Trava anti furto Kensington mFixando a TV Parede m Especifica es 63 8 70 Portugu s 1 Hod gt S e S a CONFIGURAGAO DA SUA TV il Lista de fun es Imagem ajust vel e defini es de som que podem ser armazenadas na mem ria da TV Temporizador autom tico para ligar e desligar a TV Sleep Timer especial Excelente rede de comunica o e interface digital Com um sintonizador digital HD integrado as transmiss es HD sem assinatura podem ser visualizadas sem a necessidade de cabo receptor de sat lite conversor Set Top Box Conex o HDMI DVI do seu PC para esta TV Qualidade de imagem excelente A tecnologia SRS TruSurround HD oferece um sistema virtual surround Media Play Possibilita a reprodu o de arquivos de m sica fotos e filmes salvos em um dispositivo USB ou DLNA Internet TV Voc pode usar v rios servi os de Internet e visualizar informa es teis e conte do de entretenimento Centro de Rede Dom stica Possibilita a configura o de um servidor de mensagens m vel ou renderiza o de m dia DLNA Acess rios Verifique se os itens a seguir foram inclu dos com a TV de cristal
65. on the mobile device If you selects User Input you can type the TV name by OSK On Screen Keyboard Return Exit English 75 M Using the Message Function Using this function you can view the call arrivals text message contents and schedules set on the mobile phone through the alarm window while watching TV To disable this Message alarm window set Message to Off in Setup of the Home Network Center Z The alarm window appears for 20 seconds If no key is pressed or if Cancel is selected it appears up to three times at 5 minute intervals If OK is selected or if OK is not selected while the message is displayed three times the message will be deleted The message is not deleted from the mobile phone The simple alarm window can be displayed while using some applications such as eas Media Play Contents Library etc In this case to view the contents of the message switch to TV viewing mode PHOTO When the message of an unknown mobile phone is displayed select the mobile phone in the Message item of the Home Network Center and select Denied to block the phone E ne Photo Music Movie Setup Message View Davie Return If a new text message SMS arrives while you are watching TV the alarm window appears If you click the OK button the contents of the message are displayed e Ifyou select the OK button the contents of the message are displayed A hasang e f you select the Cancel button
66. piscar ou distorcer a imagem Ajuste a sintonia b sica e depois a sintonia fina Ajuste a sintonia b sica e depois a sintonia fina Atela est preta e a luz do indicador de energia pisca regularmente No seu computador verifique se ele est ligado e o cabo do sinal ATV est utilizando o sistema de gerenciamento de energia Mova o mouse do computador ou pressione uma tecla do teclado Portugu s 77 Problema Solu o poss vel A imagem n o est est vel e parece Se o ajuste n o estiver correto execute o programa utilit rio do computador para vibrar alterar os ajustes do display quando um computador est conectado Sua TV suporta fun es de v deo multiscan dentro dos seguintes dom nios de entrada de PC frequ ncia Frequ ncia horizontal kHz 30 60 Frequ ncia vertical Hz 60 75 Taxa m xima de atualiza o de PC a 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 A imagem n o est centralizada na tela Ajuste a posi o vertical e horizontal A posi o da tela deve ser ajustada na fonte de sa da ex STB com um sinal digital Uma distor o da imagem aparece no canto da tela Se Ajuste Tela estiver selecionado com alguns dispositivos externos poder haver distor o de imagem no canto da tela Este problema causado por dispositivos externos e n o pela TV A mensagem Reconfigurar tudo para valores padr o exibida Essa mensagem aparece quando voc mant m o bot o
67. press the ENTER L button 3 Press the A or Y button to select the desired option 4 Press the lt or gt button to select the option To exit Media Play mode press the MEDIA P button on the remote control A D g Photo Music Movie Setup Use Color View On Off You can select sorting photos by color If this option is set to On the loading time may be increased to collect color information from the photos em SUM Device Exit Use Color View 4 Music Repeat Mode On Off Music Repeat Mode ins tps Continuous Movie Play Help Select to repeatedly play music files Get DivX VOD registration code Get DivX VOD deactivation code Continuous Movie Play Help gt On Off Screen Saver Run Time 4 hours Select to display the help pop up message for continuous movie playback pin ate Remove Get DivXO VOD registration code tto ON the loading time increases for collecting the color Shows the registration code authorized for the TV If you connect to the DivX web ere ee ees ee site and register the registration code with a personal account you can download VOD registration file If you play the VOD registration using Media Play the registration is completed For more information on DivX VOD visit www DivX com Get DivX VOD deactivation code When DivX VOD is not registered the registration deactivation code is displayed If you execute this function when DivX VOD is registered the current DivX VOD registra
68. royalty free patent license under the contributor s essential patent claims to make use sell offer for sale import and otherwise run modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version In the following three paragraphs a patent license is any express agreement or commitment however denominated not to enforce a patent such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement To grant such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party If you convey a covered work knowingly relying on a patent license and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy free of charge and under the terms of this License through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means then you must either 1 cause the Corresponding Source to be so available or 2 arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work or 3 arrange in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License to extend the patent license to downstream recipients Knowingly relying means you have actual knowledge that but for the patent license your conveying the covered work in a country or your recipient s use of the covered work in a country would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid If pursuant
69. set The color information extracted from a photo file may be different from your expectations You can change the color and preference Z PTP does not support folder sort mode Favorites Setting Select 4 Tools Return Q Basic View Shows the folders on the USB memory device If you select a folder and press the ENTER C button only the photo files contained in the selected folder are displayed When sorted according to the Basic View you cannot set Favorite files O Timeline Sorts photos by date It sorts by year and month from the earliest photo Q Color gt Red Yellow Green Blue Magenta Black Gray Unclassified Sorts photos by color You can change the photo color information You should set the Use Color View to on in the Setup menu before sorting photos by color Q Folder Sorts photos by folder If there are many folders in USB the photos files are shown in order in each folder The photo file in the Root folder is shown first and the others are shown in alphabetical order by name Q Preference gt wi kkk dd Sorts photos by preference Favorite You can change the photo preferences Changing the Favorites Setting Select the desired photo in the Photo list then press the Green button repeatedly until the desired setting appears Up to 3 stars can be selected The stars are for grouping purposes only For example the 3 star setting does not have any priority ov
70. show c for details The hypothetical commands show w and show c should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License Of course your program s commands might be different for a GUI interface you would use an about box You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the program if necessary For more information on this and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL see lt http www gnu org licenses gt The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs If your program is a subroutine library you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library If this is what you want to do use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License But first please read lt http www gnu org philosophy why not lgpl html gt E GNU Lesser General Public License LGPL Version 3 29 June 2007 Copyright C 2007 Free Software Foundation Inc lt http fsf org gt Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The GNU General Public License is a free copyleft license for software and other kinds of works The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works By contrast the GNU General Public License
71. sica My s bron Con Pressione o bot o lt ou gt para selecionar o arquivo de m sica desejado Em seguida pressione o bot o amarelo Repita a opera o acima para selecionar v rios arquivos de Musica Amarca wv aparece no arquivo de m sica selecionado 5 Pressione o bot o TOOLS O menu de op o muda de acordo com o status atual WU Reproduzir o grupo atual Usando este menu voc s pode reproduzir arquivos de m sica do grupo de classifica o que estiver selecionado Q Copiar Copiar grupo atual Cop arq sel Quando diversos arquivos est o selecionados Selecione a M sica para copiar Ou selecione v rios arquivos pressionando o bot o amarelo Pressione o bot o TOOLS para selecionar Copiar ou Copiar grupo atual Cop arq sel Os arquivos no dispositivo USB s o salvos na mem ria da TV Voc s pode copiar os arquivos salvos no dispositivo USB Quando a mem ria da TV est cheia arquivos n o podem ser copiados O Excluir Excluir tudo Apagar arq selecionado Quando v rios arquivos est o selecionados Selecione o arquivo para excluir Ou selecione v rios arquivos pressionando o bot o amarelo Pressione o bot o TOOLS para selecionar Excluir ou Excluir tudo Apagar arq selecionado Os arquivos s o exclu dos Voc s pode excluir arquivos salvos na mem ria da TV N o poss vel recuperar um arquivo exclu do Q Alterar Grupo Quando a classifica o for porHumor po
72. sinal DTV a reo a TV emitir um som de 5 1 canais ao receiver do home theater Quanto a fonte um componente digital como um DVD e estiver conectada TV via HDMI somente ser ouvido som de 2 canais do receiver do home theater Caso ocorra interrup o no fornecimento de energia TV quando o Receiver estiver definido como Ligado retirando o cabo da tomada ou devido a uma queda de energia o Selecionar Alto falante pode estar definido como Alto falante Ext ao ligar a TV novamente Portugu s 63 H Solu o de problemas para Anynett Problema Solu o poss vel Anynet n o est e Verifique se o dispositivo Anynett O sistema Anynet somente funciona com funcionando dispositivos Anynet e Conecte somente um receiver home theater e Verifique se o cabo de for a do dispositivo Anynet est conectado corretamente e Verifique as conex es dos cabos do dispositivo Anynet de v deo udio HDMI 1 3 e Verifique se o Anynet HDMI CEC est configurado em On Ligado no menu de configura o do Anynet e Verifique se o controle remoto da TV est no modo TV Verifique se um controle remoto exclusivo Anynett e O Anynet n o funciona em determinadas situa es Busca de canais opera o de Media Play Plug amp Play etc e Ao conectar ou remover o cabo HDMI 1 3 procure novamente dispositivos ou desligue a TV e ligue a novamente Verifique se a fun o Anynet do disposit
73. symbol is displayed Allow All Press to unlock all TV ratings Block All Press to lock all TV ratings Q Melody Off Low Medium High A melody sound can be set to come on when the TV is powered On or Off The Melody does not play When no sound is output from the TV because the MUTE button has been pressed When no sound is output from the TV because the volume has been reduced to minimum with the VOL button When the TV is turned off by Sleep Timer function Q Energy Saving Off Low Medium High Auto This feature adjusts the brightness of the TV in order to reduce power consumption When watching TV at night set the Energy Saving mode option to High to reduce eye fatigue as well as power consumption az Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu You can also set the Energy Saving by selecting Tools Energy Saving Q AV Color System Auto PAL M PAL N NTSC Normally the TV can receive image and sound with good quality when in the mode Auto This mode detects the signal color system automatically In case of some signal reception with color unsatisfactory select the AV Color System Mode to PAL M PAL N or NTSC Q PIP For detailed procedures on setting up options refer to page 23 English 28 E Setting the Time Q Clock Plug amp Play Language English Setting the clock is necessary in order to use the various timer features of the TV 4 The current time will appear every tim
74. tempo de carregamento maior para coletar Mover 4b Ajustar O Retornar Ajuda da reprodu o continua do filme Ligado Desligado Selecione para exibir a mensagem pop up de ajuda para a reprodu o cont nua do filme Obter c digo de registro de DivX VOD Mostra o c digo de registro autorizado para a TV Se voc entrar no site do DivX e registrar o c digo de registro com uma conta pessoal poder baixar o arquivo de registro de VOD Se voc reproduzir o registro de VOD usando o Media Play o registro estar conclu do Para mais informa o sobre DivX VOD visite www DivX com Obtenha o c d desativa o do VOD DivX Quando DivX VOD n o est registrado o c digo de desativa o de registro exibido Se voc executar esta fun o quando DivX VOD estiver registrado o registro atual do DivX VOD ser desativado Tempo de execu o do protetor de tela 2 horas 4 horas 8 horas Selecione para configurar o tempo de espera antes da exibi o do protetor de tela Informa es Selecione para visualizar as informa es do dispositivo conectado Remover com seguran a Voc pode remover o dispositivo com seguran a da TV Portugu s 55 MEDIA PLAY DLNA Configuragao da Rede DLNA O DLNA permite que voc acesse imagens m sicas e videos salvos em seu PC na sua TV por meio de uma conex o de rede no modo Media Play Isto elimina a necessidade de copi los para um dispositivo de armazename
75. the USB1 HDD or USB2 jack on the side of the TV 3 When the Application selection screen is displayed press the ENTER Ls button to select Media Play USB amp DLNA or GM MTP Media Transfer Protocol is not supported The file system supports FAT16 FAT32 and NTFS Certain types of USB Digital camera and audio devices may not be compatible with this TV Media Play only supports USB Mass Storage Class devices MSC MSC is a Mass Storage Class Bulk Only Transport device Examples of MSC are Thumb drives Flash Card Readers and USB HDD USB HUB are not supported 7 Please connect directly to the USB port of your TV If you are using a separate cable connection there may be a USB compatibility problem pag A D G Before connecting your device to the TV please back up your files to prevent fee Music Movie Setup them from damage or loss of data SAMSUNG is not responsible for any data mr Sian file damage or data loss Connect a USB HDD to the dedicated port USB1 HDD port However if the connected device requires high power the USB1 HDD may fail to support the device Do not disconnect the USB device while it is loading MSC supports MP3 and JPEG files while a PTP device supports JPEG files only The higher the resolution of the image the longer it takes to display on the screen The maximum supported JPEG resolution is 15360X8640 pixels For unsupported or corrupted files the Not Sup
76. the lt or gt button to select a sorting standard Basic View Timeline Title Folder Preference The movie files are sorted according to the newly selected sorting standard 5 Press the gt Play ENTERL lt button to play the movie in the order selected o m Favorites Setting Select 21 Tools 9 Return Movie information is automatically set You can change the preference W Basic View Shows the folders of the USB memory device If you select a folder and press the ENTER Ls button only the movie files contained in the selected folder are displayed When sorted according to the Basic View you cannot set Favorite files O Timeline Sorts movies by date It sorts by year and month from the earliest movie Q Title Sorts and displays the movie titles in symbol number alphabet special order O Folder If there are many folders in USB the movies files are shown in order in each folder The movie file in the Root folder is shown first and the others are shown in alphabetical order by name Q Preference wi kkk dd Sorts movies by preference Favorite You can change the movie preferences Changing the Favorites Setting Select the desired movie file in the movie list then press the Green button repeatedly until the desired setting appears Up to 3 stars can be selected The stars are for grouping purposes only For example the 3 star setting does not have any priority over the one star setting English
77. the DVD Blu ray player Cable Box Satellite receiver Set Top Box 7 Each DVD Blu ray player Cable Box Satellite receiver Set Top Box has a different back panel configuration When connecting a DVD Blu ray player Cable Box Satellite receiver Set Top Box match the color of the connection terminal to the cable Use the HDMI IN3 DVI IN jack for DVI connection to an external device Use a DVI to HDMI cable or DVI HDMI adapter DVI to HDMI for video connection and the DVI IN AUDIO jacks for audio When using an HDMI DVI cable connection you must use the HDMI IN3 DVI IN jack 4 When using an HDMI DVI cable connection you must use the HDMI IN3 DVI IN jack English 8 F Connecting a DVD Blu ray player Cable Box Satellite receiver Set Top Box via Component cables The rear panel jacks on your TV make it easy to connect a DVD Blu ray player Cable Box Satellite receiver Set Top Box to your TV DVD Blu ray player Cable Box TV Rear Panel Satellite receiver Set Top Box Audio Cable Not supplied Component Cable Not supplied 1 Connect a Component Cable between the COMPONENT IN 1 or 2 Y Ps PR jacks on the TV and the COMPONENT Y Ps Pr jacks on the DVD Blu ray player Cable Box Satellite receiver Set Top Box 2 Connect Audio Cables between the COMPONENT IN 1 or 2 R AUDIO
78. them step by step Enjoy these contents which will give you great ideas for meals The recipes introduced in the Cooking contents on the Samsung TV are based on recipes published by Anness Publishing The copyrights of the Cooking contents and all issues related to them are reserved by Practical Pictures Q Game This category provides entertainment games for the whole family For the buttons used in the games refer to the directions on the screen Color Buttons for Games Button Operations Red Press to move to the game home screen Green Press to pause the game Yellow Option Key Blue Press to exit the game Q Children This is educational and interactive content that children can watch repeatedly The copyrights of the Children contents and issues related to them reserved by UpToTen Q Wellness This is beneficial health management content that provides stretching and massage exercises that can be enjoyed by the whole family Q Others The default content is not saved in the TV memory You can copy new content to the TV memory using the Content Management screen E Using the Content Management Q Content Management You can add or delete contents using the Content Management You can select multiple content items by selecting content items repeatedly and pressing CONE the Yellow button J Management My Contents You can check the content saved in the TV memory for each subitem of the Content Library e Select a
79. to copy distribute and or modify it For the developers and authors protection the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software For both users and authors sake the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them although the manufacturer can do so This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users freedom to change the software The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use which is precisely where it is most unacceptable Therefore we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products If such problems arise substantially in other domains we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL as needed to protect the freedom of users Finally every program is threatened constantly by software patents States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on general purpose computers but in those that do we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary To prevent this the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non free The precise terms and conditions for copying
80. to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement you convey or propagate by procuring conveyance of a covered work and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use propagate modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it A patent license is discriminatory if it does not include within the scope of its coverage prohibits the exercise of or is conditioned on the non exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work and under which the third party grants to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you a discriminatory patent license a in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you or copies made from those copies or b primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work unless you entered into that arrangement or that patent license was granted prior to 28 March 2007 Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement th
81. with desired service site Account will be made less than 10 Character of Account should be limited to 10 If there is no service that needs log in you can not create account Account Management Beee Service Site You can register log in information of service site such as YouTube Change Password Change the password of your account Delete Delete the account If you forget the password of account press the remote control buttons in the following sequence which resets the Internet TV POWER off gt MUTE 9 4 8 POWER on If you use this function all accounts will be deleted English 69 Q System Setup Ticker Autorun Ticker Duration may not be supported depending on country Change the Service Lock password The default password number of a new TV set is 0 0 0 0 If you forget the password press the remote control buttons in the following sequence which resets the password to 0 0 0 0 POWER off MUTE 8 gt 2 4 POWER on Service Duration Select to set the service duration time before the screen saver appears Ticker Autorun gt Off On Select to set ticker to run automatically or not when turning on the TV Ticker Duration Select to set the service duration time before the screen saver appears Q Properties Display information of Internet TV You can measure the speed of your Internet TV service using Measuring the speed of the Internet TV service Wl Using the
82. written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA lhash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptso
83. 29 30 8 The description for the connection method providing the best HD screen quality is displayed Check the description and press the ENTER 4 button 9 Press the lt or gt button to select See Product Guide or Watch TV Press the ENTER Ls button e See Product Guide You are moved to the Product Guide where you can view the introduction to the main functions of your new HDTV e Watch TV You can watch the memorized channels If you want to reset this feature 1 Press the MENU button to display the menu Press the A or Y button to select Setup then press the ENTER Ls button Plug amp Play 2 Press the ENTER C button again to select Plug amp Play Seon EE The Plug amp Play feature is only available in the TV mode Tis If a channel is locked using the Child Lock function the PIN input window appears refer Caption to page 28 Network Setup English 14 CHANNEL E Channel Menu Q Antenna Air Cable Before your television can begin memorizing the available channels you must specify the type of signal source that is connected to the TV i e an Air or a Cable system AJ Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu You can also set the Antenna by Q E E 5 2 Auto Program selecting Tools Switch to Cable or Switch to Air Full Guide If the antenna is connected to ANT 1 IN AIR select Air and if it is connected to ANT 2 IN P en CABLE select Cable eee If both ANT 1
84. 3 11 Divx 4 x Divx 5 1 Divx 6 0 XviD H 264 BP H 264 MP H 264 HP MPEG 4 SP MPEG 4 ASP Motion JPEG Audio codec MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM MULAW ALAW mkv MKV Divx 3 11 Divx 4 x Divx 5 1 Divx 6 0 XviD H 264 BP H 264 MP MPEG 4 ASP H 264 HP MPEG 4 SP Motion JPEG MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM MULAW ALAW AAC asf ASF Divx 3 11 Divx 4 x Divx 5 1 Divx 6 0 XviD H 264 BP H 264 MP H 264 HP MPEG 4 SP Window Media Video v9 MPEG 4 ASP WMA MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM MULAW ALAW AAC wmv VC1 mp4 MP4 SMP4 H 264 BP H 264 MP H 264 HP MPEG 4 SP MPEG 4 ASP ADPCM HE AAC mp3 XVID 3gp 3GPP H 264 BP H 264 MP H 264 HP ADPCM HE AAC MPEG 4 SP MPEG 4 ASP vro ps VRO VOB MPEG2 AC3 MPEG LPCM MPEG1 mpg MPEG Program Stream AC3 MPEG LPCM MPEG2 Program Stream mpeg ps others ts MPEG2 Transport Stream H 264 Transport Stream AAC HE AAC MP3 DD VC1 Transport Stream English 53 Video Play Control Buttons Button Operations ENTER C Play Pause the movie file gt Play the movie file N Pause the movie file TOOLS Run various functions from the Movie men
85. 4 Problem E Troubleshooting for Anynet Possible Solution Anynet does not work Check if the device is an Anynet device The Anynet system supports Anynet devices only Connect only one receiver home theater Check if the Anynet device power cord is properly connected Check the Anynet device s Video Audio HDMI 1 3 cable connections Check whether Anynet HDMI CEC is set to On in the Anynet setup menu Check whether the TV remote control is in TV mode Check whether it is Anynet exclusive remote control Anynet doesn t work in certain situations Searching channels Operating Media Play Plug amp Play etc When connecting or removing the HDMI 1 3 cable please make sure to search devices again or turn your TV off and on again Check if the Anynet Function of Anynet device is set on want to start Anynet Check if the Anynet device is properly connected to the TV and check if the Anynet HDMI CEC is set to On in the Anynet Setup menu Press the TV button on the TV remote control to switch to TV Then press the TOOLS button to show the Anynett menu and select a menu you want want to exit Anynett Select View TV in the Anynet menu Press the SOURCE button on the TV remote control and select a device other than Anynet devices Press V CH A PRE CH and FAV CH to change the TV mode Note that the channel button operates only when a tuner embedded Anynett device is not connecte
86. ANTES So o 88 Portugu s 3 i Visualizando o painel de conexao Painel lateral da TV Painel traseiro da TV 2 3 4 12 DVIIN HDMIIN AUDIO NI INAH DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL Entrada de energia 2 ooo ooo Acor e o formato do produto podem variar dependendo do modelo HDMI IN 1 2 3 DVI IN 4 DVI IN AUDIO Conecta a sa da HDMI de um dispositivo uma entrada HDMI Nenhuma conex o de som necess ria para conex es entre dispositivos HDMI PC IN AUDIO PC Conecta as sa das de udio e video do seu PC ANT 1 IN AIR ANT 2 IN CABLE Conecta uma antena ou um sistema de TV a cabo LAN Conecte um cabo de rede a esta porta para conectar se a rede TRAVA KENSINGTON A trava Kensington opcional um dispositivo usado para proteger fisicamente o sistema quando usado em um local p blico Se deseja usar o dispositivo de trava entre em contato com o revendedor no qual a TV foi adquirida A posi o da trava Kensington poder ser diferente dependendo do modelo FONE DE OUVIDO Os fones de ouvido podem ser conectados sa da de fones de ouvido do seu aparelho Enquanto os fones de ouvido estiverem conectados o som dos alto falantes internos ser desativado A utiliza o da fun o de udio fica restrita ao conectar fones de ouvido TV 4 O uso prolongado de fones de ouvido em um volume alto po
87. CONSEQUENTES HONOR RIOS ADVOCAT CIOS DESPESAS OU QUALQUER TIPO DE DANO SEJA QUAL FOR ORIGINADO DE OU RELACIONADO A QUAISQUER INFORMA ES CONTIDAS EM OU PELO USO DA BIBLIOTECA DE CONTE DO MESMO SE ALERTADA SOBRE A POSSIBILIDADE DE TAIS DANOS i Utiliza o do conte do da memoria da TV poss vel utilizar o conte do armazenado na mem ria da TV poss vel adicionar excluir conte dos a da mem ria da TV Para adicionar excluir conte do selecione Gerenciamento de conte do Para retornar ao menu principal de Content Library pressione EXIT W Galeria Esta fun o reproduz uma apresenta o de slides com imagens de alta resolu o e m sica de E Galeria fundo e produz v rias atmosferas Com a fun o Galeria da TV voc pode mudar a atmosfera da sua casa Os direitos autorais do conte do de Galeria e todas as quest es relacionadas a ele s o reservados pela TimeSpace Inc Pressione o bot o ENTER Ls para pausar a apresenta o de slides e depois pressione o bot o ENTER Ls para reiniciar o a apresenta o Pressione o bot o INFO para exibir informa es sobre a foto selecionada N o ser exibido caso a foto n o possua informa es Portugu s 65 Q Culinaria poss vel exibir v rias receitas que podem ser seguidas passo a passo Utilize as para ter grandes id ias para suas refei es As receitas de Culin ria da TV Samsung t m como base o conte do publicado pela Anness
88. Cable Network Setup Auto Setup If you connect the LAN cable and it supports DHCP the Internet Protocol IP Settings are automatically configured teme Protocol Setup Auto Setup 1 Set Network Type to Cable Kevork Tiat 2 Select Cable Network Setup 3 Set Internet Protocol Setup to Auto Setup The Internet Protocol is set automatically 4 Select Network Test to check the network connectivity Move C Enter O Return Cable Network Setup Cable Network Setup Manual Setup To connect the TV to the LAN using a static IP address you must set up the Internet Protocol Cable Network Setup IP Internet Protocol Setup Manual Setup 1 Set Network Type to Cable peal Select Cable Network Setup IP Address Subnet Mask 2 3 Set Internet Protocol Setup to Manual Setup E 4 Setup IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway and DNS Server Press the number buttons on the remote control when you set the Network manually se Moves Ca Enter Reu 5 Select Network Test to check the network connectivity English 34 Wireless Network Setup The menu is activated only if the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter is connected e Internet Protocol Setup Auto Setup Manual Setup e Network Test You can test or confirm the network connection status after setting up the network When unable to connect to an AP Access Point Your TV may fail to locate an AP Access Point that is configured as a private SSID type In this case please change the AP se
89. Caso nenhuma tecla seja pressionada ou caso Cane seja selecionado ela ser exibida at tr s vezes em intervalos de 5 minutos Caso o OK seja selecionado ou caso OK n o seja selecionado enquanto a mensagem exibida tr s vezes a mensagem ser exclu da A mensagem n o Sum exclu da do telefone celular A janela de alarme simples pode ser exibida durante a utiliza o de alguns aplicativos como Media Play Biblioteca de conte do etc Nesse caso alterne para o modo de exibi o de TV para visualizar o conte do da mensagem Quando a mensagem de um telefone celular desconhecido for exibida selecione o telefone celular no item Mensag do Cent Rede Dom stica e selecione Recusd Photo Music Movie Setup para bloquear o n mero de telefone positivo Retornar Caso uma nova mensagem de texto SMS seja recebida enquanto voc assiste husband TV a janela de alarme ser exibida Caso voc clique no bot o OK o conte do da mensagem ser exibido Desejaisuaizaros Alarme de recebimento de chamada Caso uma chamada seja recebida enquanto voc assiste TV a janela de alarme ser exibida detalhes Caso voc selecione o bot o OK o conte do da mensagem ser exibido Caso voc selecione o bot o Cancel a janela de alarme ser exibida at tr s vezes em intervalos de 5 minutos poss vel definir as configura es de exibi o do conte do de mensagens de texto SMS no telefone celular Para conhecer os
90. Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products please contact the SAMSUNG customer care center Contate a SAMSUNG EM TODO O MUNDO Caso tenha duvidas ou comentarios sobre os produtos da Samsung entre em contato com o centro de atendimento ao cliente da SAMSUNG Country Customer Care Center amp Web Site ARGENTINE 0800 333 3733 www samsung com ar BRAZIL ps www samsung com br CHILE 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com cl COLOMBIA 01 8000112112 www samsung com co COSTA RICA 0 800 507 7267 www samsung com latin ECUADOR 1 800 10 7267 www samsung com latin EL SALVADOR 800 6225 www samsung com latin GUATEMALA 1 800 299 0013 www samsung com latin HONDURAS 800 7919267 www samsung com latin JAMAICA 1 800 234 7267 www samsung com latin PANAMA 800 7267 www samsung com latin PUERTO RICO 1 800 682 3180 www samsung com latin REP DOMINICA 1 800 751 2676 www samsung com latin NICARAGUA 00 1800 5077267 www samsung com latin MEXICO 01 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com mx TRINIDAD amp TOBAGO 1 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com latin VENEZUELA 0 800 100 5303 www samsung com latin IMPORTADO POR AV PRESIDENTE MASARIK 111 INT701 COL CHAPULTEPEC MORALES C P 11570 DELEGACION MIGUEL HIDALGO MEXICO DISTRITO FEDERAL Tel 01 55 5747 5100 01 800 726 7864 BN68 01977A 00 SERIES 6 650 imagine the possibilities Thank you for p
91. Content Library CC Controla o decodificador de legenda GUIDE Exibi o do guia de programa o eletr nica EPG Electronic Program Guide Portugu s 5 il Controle remoto SAMSUNG Coloca o das pilhas no controle remoto 1 Levante a tampa localizada na parte traseira do controle remoto conforme mostrado na figura 2 Coloque duas pilhas de tamanho AAA Certifique se de combinar os p los e das pilhas com o diagrama no interior do compartimento 3 Recoloque a tampa do compartimento das pilhas Remova as pilhas e guarde as em um local fresco e seco se n o for utilizar o controle remoto por um longo per odo Considerando a utiliza o normal da TV as pilhas podem durar aproximadamente um ano Se o controle remoto n o funcionar verifique o seguinte e ATV est ligada Os p los mais e menos das pilhas est o invertidos As pilhas est o descarregadas H falta de energia ou o cabo de energia est fora da tomada Existe uma luz fluorescente especial ou um sinal de n on nas proximidades CONEX ES Ligar antenas VHF e UHF Se a antena tiver um conjunto de cabos condutores semelhantes ao da ilustra o consulte a se o Antenas com cabo condutor duplo horizontal de 300 Q a seguir O C Se a antena tiver um cabo condutor semelhante ilustra o da direita consulte Antenas com cabo condutor redondo de 75 Q m Se voc tiver d
92. DVD player conectado a entrada HDMI 1 e ela estiver selecionada no momento as configura es e ajustes ser o salvos para a entrada HDMI 1 Cor Vermelho Verde Azul Amarelo Ciano ou Magenta Cor disponibilizada quando Espa o de Cores est definido como Personalizado Em Cor voc pode ajustar os valores RGB para a cor selecionada Para restaurar o valor RGB ajustado selecione Restaurar Padr es Vermelho Ajusta o n vel de satura o de vermelho da cor selecionada Verde Ajusta o n vel de satura o de verde da cor selecionada Azul Ajusta o n vel de satura o de azul da cor selecionada Restaurar Padr es Restaura o espa o de cores para os valores padr o Estabilidade de Branco Voc pode ajustar a temperatura da cor para obter imagens com cores mais naturais Verm Offset Ajusta a tonalidade da cor vermelha Verde Offset Ajusta a tonalidade da cor verde Azul Offset Ajusta a tonalidade da cor azul Verm Gain Ajusta o brilho da cor vermelha Verde Gain Ajusta o brilho da cor verde Azul Gain Ajusta o brilho da cor azul Restaurar Padr es A estabilidade de branco estabelecida anteriormente retornar aos padr es de f brica Tom de Pele Voc pode enfatizar o tom de pele na imagem A altera o do valor de ajuste atualizar a tela ajustada Aprimoramento da margem Desligado Ligado Voc pode destacar as margens de um objeto da imagem xvYCC Desligado Ligado A conf
93. Device 3 Anynet Device 4 ES be HDMIOUT HDMI OUT S gt S gt HDMI 1 3 Cable HDMI 1 3 Cable HDMI 1 3 Cable HDMI 1 3 Cable 1 Connect the HDMI IN 1 2 3 DVI IN or 4 jack on the TV and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynet device using an HDMI cable To connect to Home Theater Home Theater Anynet Device 1 DIGTAL ALON HOMIOUT HOMIIN HDMI OUT HDMI 1 3 Cable Anynet Device 3 Anynet Device 4 con ae HOMIOUT E E HDMI 1 3 Cable HDMI 1 3 Cable 1 Connect the HDMI IN 1 2 3 DVI IN or 4 jack on the TV and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynet device using an HDMI cable Connect the HDMI IN jack of the home theater and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynett device using an HDMI cable Connect the Optical cable between the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL jack on your TV and the Digital Audio Input on the Home Theater 4 When following the connection above the Optical jack only outputs 2 channel audio You will only hear sound from the Home Theater s Front Left and Right speakers and the subwoofer If you want to hear 5 1 channel audio connect the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL jack on the DVD Satellite Box ie Anynet Device 1 or 2 directly to the Amplifi er or Home Theater not
94. ELIEVE TO BE RELIABLE SAMSUNG CANNOT AND DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY VALIDITY TIMELINESS OR COMPLETENESS OF ANY INFORMATION OR DATA MADE AVAILABLE TO YOU FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE SHALL SAMSUNG BE HELD LIABLE WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ATTORNEY FEES EXPENSES OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES WHATSOEVER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN OR THE USE OF THE CONTENTS LIBRARY EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES il Using the TV Memory Contents You can use enjoy content stored in the TV memory You can add delete content to from the TV memory To add delete content select Content Management To return to Content Library main menu press the EXIT button Q Gallery This function plays a SlideShow with high resolution images and background music and produces various atmospheres Using the Gallery function of the TV you can change your home atmosphere The copyrights of the Gallery contents and all issues related to them are reserved by TimeSpace Inc Press the ENTER L lt button to pause the SlideShow and also press the ENTER L button to resume the SlideShow Press the INFO button to display information on the selected photo This is not displayed if the photo has no information English 66 O Cooking You can view various recipes and then easily follow
95. English 37 Q Self Diagnosis Picture Test If you think you have a picture problem perform the picture test Check the color pattern on the Self Diagnosis screen to see if the problem still exists e Yes If the test pattern does not appear or there is noise in the test pattern select Yes Sees There may be a problem with the TV Contact Samsung s call center for assistance e No If the test pattern is properly displayed select No There may be a problem with your external equipment Please check your connections If the problem still persists refer to the external device s user manual Move Enter O Return Sound Test If you think you have a sound problem please perform the sound test You can check the sound by playing a built in melody sound through the TV If you hear no sound from the TV s speakers before performing the sound test make sure Speaker Select is set to TV speaker in the Sound menu The melody will be heard during the test even if Speaker Select is set to External Speaker or the sound is muted by pressing the MUTE button e Yes If during the sound test you can hear sound only from one speaker or not at all select Yes There may be a problem with the TV Contact Samsung s call center for assistance e No If you can hear sound from the speakers select No There may be a problem with your external equipment Please check your connections If the problem still persists refer to the external device s us
96. HDMI output No sound connection is needed for an HDMI to HDMI connection PC IN AUDIO PC Connects to the video and audio output jacks on your PC ANT 1 IN AIR ANT 2 IN CABLE Connects to an antenna or cable TV system LAN Connect a LAN cable to this port to connect to the Network KENSINGTON LOCK The Kensington Lock optional is a device used to physically fix the system when used in a public place If you want to use a locking device contact the dealer where you purchased the TV The location of the Kensington Lock may be different depending on its model HEADPHONE Headphone may be connected to the headphone output on your set While the head phone is connected the sound from the built in speakers will be disabled Using the sound function is restricted when connecting headphones to the TV 4 Prolonged use of headphones at a high volume may damage your hearing You will not hear sound from the speakers when you connect headphones to the TV The headphone volume and TV volume are adjusted separately DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL Connects to a Digital Audio component such as a Home theater receiver SERVICE Connector for service only AUDIO OUT R AUDIO L Connects to the audio input jacks on your Amplifier Home theater COMPONENT IN 1 2 Connects Component video audio English 4 O AVIN 4 2 VIDEO R AUDIO L Video and audio inputs for external devices such as a camcorder or VCR USB1
97. IN AIR and ANT 2 IN CABLE are connected select the antenna input you LNA want If the antenna input is not selected properly noise may appear on the screen O Auto Program Air Air antenna signal Cable Cable antenna signal Air Cable Air and Cable antenna signals If the antenna is connected to ANT 1 IN AIR select Air and if it is connected to ANT 2 IN CABLE select Cable If both ANT 1 IN AIR and ANT 2 IN CABLE are connected select the Air Cable If you want to stop Auto Programming press the ENTER Ls button The Stop Auto Program message will be displayed Select Yes by pressing the lt or D button then press the ENTER C button Q Full Guide Mini Guide The EPG Electronic Programme Guide information is provided by the broadcasters Programme entries may appear blank or out of date as a result of the information broadcast on a given channel The display will dynamically update as soon as new information becomes available You can also display the guide menu simply by pressing the GUIDE button To configure the Default Guide refer to the descriptions Full Guide Displays the programme information as time ordered One hour segments Two hours of programme information is displayed which may be scrolled forwards or backwards in time Mini Guide The information of each programme is displayed by each line on the current channel Mini Guide screen from the current programme onwards according to the progra
98. NS You must enter these values to complete the network settings If you do not know the values ask your network administrator For the information on how to configure and connect a Sharer Router refer to the owner s manual for the corresponding product You can connect the TV to the LAN directly without connecting it through a Sharer Router If you use an IP Sharer IP Router that supports DHCP you can set up the device as either DHCP or static IP For the procedures to use a static IP address ask your Internet Service Provider SSS 8S BSS English 32 Q Network Connection Wireless You can connect to the network wirelessly through a wireless IP sharer TV Side Panel The LAN Port on Wireless IP sharer the Wall Samsung Wireless I LAN Adapter or 1 Connect the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter into the USB1 HDD or USB2 terminal of the TV You must use the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter WISO9ABGN to use a wireless network Samsung s Wireless LAN adapter is sold separately The WISO9ABGN Wireless LAN adapter is offered by select retailers Ecommerce sites and Samsungparts com To use a wireless network your TV must be connected to a wireless IP sharer If the wireless IP sharer supports DHCP your TV can use a DHCP or static IP address to connect to the wireless network Samsung s Wireless LAN adapter supports IEEE 802 11A IEEE 802 11B IEEE 802 11G IEEE 802 11N Whe
99. P roteador See E eee Cabo do modem Cabo de rede Cabo de rede poss vel conectar a porta de LAN e a TV diretamente dependendo do status da sua rede Porta LAN na parede Painel traseiro da TV Cabo de rede Os terminais a posi o e o tipo da porta do dispositivo externo podem variar dependendo do fabricante Se a aloca o do endere o IP pelo servidor DHCP falhar desligue o modem externo ligue o novamente depois de 10 segundos e tente novamente Para obter informa es sobre conex es entre o modem externo e o distribuidor roteador consulte o manual do propriet rio do produto correspondente Voc pode conectar a TV LAN diretamente sem passar pelo distribuidor roteador N o poss vel utilizar um modem ADSL de conex o manual porque ele n o compat vel com DHCP Voc deve usar um modem ADSL de conex o autom tica Ss e BB Portugu s 31 Conex o de LAN para ambiente de IP est tico Os procedimentos para configura o de uma rede com um endere o IP est tico s o descritos a seguir Voc deve inserir manualmente o endere o IP a m scara de sub rede o gateway e o DNS fornecidos pelo seu provedor de internet ISP Conecte a porta LAN no painel traseiro da TV e a porta LAN da parede com o cabo de rede 1 Porta LAN na parede Cabo de rede Painel traseiro da TV
100. PSK WPA2PSK 2 Tipo de criptografia WEP TKIP AES Ao aplicar a chave de seguran a para o modo ad hoc apenas os seguintes s o suportados 1 Modo de autentica o COMPARTILHADO WPANONE 2 Tipo de criptografia WEP TKIP AES Caso seu AP ofere a suporte a WPS Configura o wi fi protegida poss vel conectar rede via PBC Configura o de bot o ou PIN N mero de identifica o pessoal A WPS ir configurar a chave WPA e SSID automaticamente em qualquer modo Caso o dispositivo n o seja certificado ele pode n o se conectar TV usando o Adaptador de rede sem fio Samsung Portugu s 33 i Configurando a Rede QO Tipo de Rede Selecione cabo ou sem fio como m todo para conectar se a rede A ale S 4 Tipo de Rede Cabo O menu ativado apenas se o Adaptador de rede sem fio Samsung estiver conectado E B Bloqueio de Canais Ligado Cabo 3 Mudar Senha Conecte rede usando um cabo E he Sem fio Prefer ncia Conecte a rede no modo sem fio Q Configura o da Rede Configura o de Rede a cabo quando Tipo de Rede est definido como Cabo Verifique se o cabo de rede est conectado e Configura o de protocolo de Internet Configura o autom tica manual e Teste de Rede poss vel testar ou confirmar o status de conex o da rede ap s configur la Quando n o for poss vel conectar a uma rede com fio Se o seu provedor de internet possuir registrado o en
101. Previs o do Tempo para m ltiplas cidades Voc pode ver as previs es semanais e di rias e tamb m selecionar as cidades favoritas Q Previs o Semanal e Para cada uma das cidades favoritas poss vel visualizar a previs o semanal e Ap s selecionar esta op o Previs o Di ria use os bot es A e Y para trocar a cidade gt Mover 5 Retornar Q Previs o Di ria e Para cada uma das sete cidades favoritas poss vel visualizar a previs o di ria e Ap s selecionar esta op o use os bot es A e Y para trocar o dia Manaus Q Alterando Cidades Favoritas e O widget Previs o do Tempo possibilita que se utilizem sete cidades favoritas para observar previs es semanais e di rias A configura o de f brica j envia um conjunto de sete cidades pr definidas Para voc alterar esta configura o acesse o item Cidades Favoritas Apague anteriormente o n mero de cidades que voc deseja modificar caso o n mero j seja inferior a sete n o necess rio apagar Mover C Selecionar gt Retornar Use os bot es A Y lt 4 e gt para navegar nesta tela Ao pressionar o bot o Lista de Cidades obt m se uma lista onde se seleciona novas cidades Escolha a cidade por ordem alfab tica Pressione o bot o ENTER na letra desejada Pressione ENTER no nome da cidade para selecionar Utilize o bot o lt para retornar para o menu e escolha nova letra Mover C2 Selecionar D Retornar Ap s concluir a s
102. Publishing Os direitos autorais do conte do de Culin ria e todas as quest es relacionadas a ele s o reservados pela Practical Pictures Q Jogos Esta categoria proporciona entretenimento para a familia toda Consulte as instru es na tela para conhecer os bot es utilizados nos jogos Bot es coloridos para jogos Bot o Opera es Vermelho Pressione para mover o jogo para a tela de in cio Verde Pressione para pausar o jogo Amarelo Tecla de op o Azul Pressione para sair do jogo Q Ingl s para crian as Este conte do educacional e interativo e as crian as podem assistir repetidamente Os direitos autorais do conte do de Ingl s para crian as e todas as quest es relacionadas a ele s o reservados pela UpToTen Q Bem estar Este conte do ben fico sa de e fornece exerc cios de massagem e alongamento que podem ser executados por toda a fam lia Q Outros O conte do padr o n o est salvo na mem ria da TV poss vel copiar novos conte dos para a mem ria da TV utilizando a tela Gerenciamento de conte do i Utilizando o Gerenciamento de conte do Q Gerenciamento de conte do poss vel adicionar ou excluir conte do com o Gerenciamento de conte do poss vel selecionar v rios itens de conte do selecionando itens de conte do Gere repetidamente e pressionando o bot o amarelo J conte do Meu conte do poss vel verificar o conte do salvo na mem ria da TV em cada sub
103. RCS DIRECTION Button Return to the previous menu Move the cursor and select an item Select the currently selected item Confirm the setting _ EXT so um Exit the on screen menu Operation the OSD On Screen Display The access step may differ depending on the selected menu w 1 Press the MENU button CH LIST l Fave Dg 4 N A 2 The main menu appears on the screen The menu s left side has icons Picture Sound Channel Setup Input Application Support 7 D Mode Standard Backlight Contrast Brightness Sharpness Color Tint G R Advanced Settings 3 Press the A or Y button to select one of the icons Then press the ENTER L lt button to access the icon s sub menu 5 Press the A or Y button to select the icon s sub menu 2 me Backlight Contrast Brightness Sharpness Color Tint G R G50 R50 Advanced Settings Picture Options 6 Press the lt or gt button to decrease or increase the value of a particular item The an jacklight foe 7 adjustment OSD may differ depending on the selected menu Move lt gt Adjust C Enter 5 Return 7 Press the ENTER C button to complete the configuration Press the EXIT button to exit TEA English 13 E Placing Your Television in Standby Mode Your set can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption The standby mode can be useful when you wish to
104. THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 16 Limitation of Liability IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES 17 Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16 If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee E END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute a
105. Tube por exemplo por meio do servi o Internet TV amp A configura o de widgets e dos servi os fornecidos por eles pode ter diferen as de acordo com o pais selecionado Depois de mudar o pa s desligue e ligue a TV Ent o voc pode usar o servi o de widget suportado no pa s que foi alterado Se o pa s estiver definido como Outros a TV n o consegue reconhecer o pa s Nesse caso selecione diretamente da lista de pa ses do servi o Se uma determinada fonte do conte do fornecido pelo provedor de conte do n o for suportada pela TV ela pode n o ser visualizada normalmente Para mais informa es sobre como configurar seu pa s consulte as instru es Recurso Plug amp Play Devido s condi es da rede poss vel a ocorr ncia de lentid o ou interrup es no funcionamento Antes de utilizar o Internet TV configure a sua rede Para mais informa es sobre como configurar sua rede consulte Configura o de rede Ao executar o Internet TV pela primeira vez as configura es b sicas s o executadas automaticamente A atualiza o pode levar alguns minutos 1 2 Pressione o bot o MENU Pressione o bot o A ou Y para selecionar Aplicativos e em seguida pressione ENTER Ls Pressione o bot o A ou Y para selecionar Internet TV e ent o pressione o bot o ENTER L lt amp Pressione o bot o Internet no controle remoto para exibir o menu Internet TV A tela User Agreement exibida Selecione
106. U Shows the Anynett device list Shows the connected device menus E g If a DVD recorder is connected the disc menu of the DVD recorder will appear device_name INFO Shows the play menu of the connected device E g Ifa DVD recorder is connected the play menu of the DVD recorder will appear Recording recorder Starts recording immediately using the recorder This is only available for devices that support the recording function Stop Recording recorder Stops recording Receiver Sound is played through the receiver If more than one recording device is connected they are displayed as recorder and if only one recording device is connected it will be represented as device_name English 63 TV Remote Control Buttons Available in Anynett Mode You can make a recording of a TV program using a Samsung recorder Device Type Operating Status Available Buttons Anynet Device After switching to the device when the menu Numeric buttons A lt gt of the corresponding device is displayed on ENTERCS buttons the screen Color buttons EXIT button After switching to the device while playing lt Backward search gt gt Forward a file search m Stop gt Play m Pause Device with built in Tuner After switching to the device when you are WV CH A button watch
107. V que pode ser baixado do website da Samsung Requisitos do sistema 1 Insira o CD do programa fornecido com a TV no PC 2 30MB de espa o livre em disco s o necess rios para a instala o do programa Se voc compartilhar arquivos at 30MB de espa o em disco r gido ser o necess rios para cada 100 arquivos Ao cancelar o compartilhamento de arquivos o espa o em disco r gido usado para armazenar as informa es das miniaturas tamb m ser liberado Formatos suportados e Imagem JPEG udio MP3 V deo AVI MKV ASF MP4 3GPP PS TS container Para detalhes sobre os formatos de video suportados consulte as instru es Reprodu o de um arquivo de filme Instalar o aplicativo 1 Execute o arquivo Setup exe no CD do programa fornecido com o produto Como alternativa fa a o download do arquivo em www samsung com 2 Instale o SAMSUNG PC Share Manager conforme descrito nas figuras abaixo 3 Quando a instala o for conclu da o cone do PC Share Manager ser exibido na rea de trabalho do computador Clique duas vezes no cone para executar o programa Portugu s 57 Uso do aplicativo DLNA O layout da tela do programa EG SAMSUNG PC Share Manager Server Media Play PC Se ES DESSE ea Ce o Folder1 Folder2 Folders Folder Folders Menus S o fornecidos os seguintes menus de aplicativo File Share Server e Help Clique para compartilhar a pas
108. a music file may differ from the expectations of the user You can change the mood and preference If there is no title information for a music file the filename is displayed Z If no information is available for the Artist Album Year or Genre the corresponding item is displayed as blank Q Basic View Shows the folders of the USB memory device If you select a folder and press the ENTER C button only the music files contained in the selected folder are displayed When sorted according to the Basic View you cannot set Favorite files O Title Sorts the music titles in symbol number alphabet special order and shows the music file Q Artist Sorts the music file by artist in symbol number alphabet special order Q Mood gt Energetic Rhythmical Sad Exciting Calm Unclassified Sorts music files by the mood You can change the music mood information Q Genre Sorts music files by the genre O Folder Sorts music files by the folder If there are many folders in USB the files are shown in order in each folder The music file in the Root folder is shown first and the others are shown in alphabetical order by name Q Preference did dede Sorts music files by preference Favorite You can change the music files preferences Changing the Favorites Setting Select the desired music file in the Music list then press the Green button repeatedly until the desired setting appears Up t
109. a 104 F 10 C a 40 C 10 a 80 sem condensa o 4 F a 113 F 20 C a 45 C 5 a 95 sem condensa o Base rotativa Esquerda Direita 20 20 Design e especifica es est o sujeitos a altera es sem aviso pr vio Este dispositivo um equipamento digital classe B Para obter dados sobre a fonte de alimenta o e o consumo de energia consulte a etiqueta que est no produto Portugu s 81
110. a fonte da legenda Sincroniza o de legenda Voc pode ajustar o sincronismo da legenda Redef sincronismo leg Voc pode redefinir o sincronismo da legenda Q Informa es A informa o de arquivo de filme exibida WU Remover com seguran a Voc pode remover o dispositivo com seguran a da TV Portugu s 54 al Utilizando o menu Configuragao Exibe as configura es do usu rio no menu Media Play 1 Pressione o bot o MEDIA P 2 Pressione o bot o lt ou gt para selecionar Setup e em seguida pressione ENTERLS 3 Pressione o bot o A ou Y para selecionar a op o desejada Pressione o bot o lt ou para selecionar a op o em seguida pressione o bot o fa T ENTER 4 Photo Music Setup Para sair do modo Media Play pressione o bot o MEDIA P no controle em SUN Dispositvo iB Sair remoto Usar Visualiza o de Cor Ligado Desligado Usar visualiza o decor 4 Desligado _ gt se a bly Modo de repeti o Ligado E poss vel selecionar fotos para classificar por cor Se esta op o estiver definida como lmh reprod cont fime Ligado Ligado o tempo de carregamento poder ser maior para obter informa es de cores Obtenha o c digo registro do VOD DivX das fotos Obtenha o c digo registro do VOD DivX Tempo Exec Protec Tela 4horas Informa es Modo Repetir M sica Ligado Desligado h Remover com seguran a Selecione para reproduzir arquivos de m sica repetidamente o
111. access permissions by using the Allow Accept Deny button To delete an item select the item and select Delete Item Q Server Server You can run or stop using your PC as a server Run DLNA Digital Media Server when Windows Starts You can determine whether to start the PC server automatically when Windows starts Change server name You can rename the PC server Enter a new name and click OK The new name will appear at the top right of the window and will appear on the TV Q Help Version The program version information message box appears E Using the DLNA Menu DLNA Digital Living Network Alliance enables content saved on a DLNA server usually your PC connected to your TV or over a network to be played Media Play enables playing content saved on a USB memory device connected to the TV while DLNA enables playing content saved on a DLNA server your PC connected to your TV or over the network The procedures to use the content are the same as those for Media Play USB amp DLNA If you install the PC share manager program supplied with the TV onto a PC you can have the PC perform the role of a DLNA server over the network For detailed procedures on using the DLNA menu refer to the Media Play instructions Press the MEDIA P button on the remote control to display the DLNA menu Press the lt or gt button to select an icon Photo Music Movie Setup then press the ENTER L lt button To exit DLNA mode press t
112. activity of conveying the work and under which the third party grants to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you a discriminatory patent license a in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you or copies made from those copies or b primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work unless you entered into that arrangement or that patent license was granted prior to 28 March 2007 Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law No Surrender of Others Freedom If conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not convey it at all For example if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program Use with the GNU Affero General Public License Notwithstanding any other provision of this License you have permission to lin
113. ados de acordo com Visual B s voc n o pode definir arquivos favoritos Q Cronograma Classifica os filmes por data Classifica por ano e m s a partir do filme mais antigo Q T tulo Classifica e exibe os t tulos de filmes na ordem simbolo numero alfabeto ordem especial O Pasta Se existirem muitas pastas no dispositivo USB os arquivos de filmes s o exibidos na ordem em cada pasta O arquivo de filme na pasta raiz exibido primeiro e os outros s o exibidos em ordem alfab tica por nome Q Prefer ncia dd kkk Classifica os filmes por prefer ncia Favorito E poss vel modificar as prefer ncias de filme Altera o das configura es de favoritos Selecione o arquivo de filme desejado na lista de filmes em seguida pressione o bot o verde repetidamente at aparecer a configura o desejada At 3 estrelas podem ser selecionadas As estrelas s o somente para fins de agrupamento Por exemplo a configura o de 3 estrelas n o possui prioridade sobre a configura o de uma estrela Portugu s 50 a Menu de op o de lista de filmes 1 Pressione o bot o MEDIA P 2 Pressione o bot o lt ou gt para selecionar Movie e em seguida pressione ENTERLS 3 Pressione o bot o A para ir se o de lista de arquivos Pressione o bot o lt ou gt para selecionar o arquivo de Filme desejado Sele o m ltipla de arquivos de filme Pressione o bot o lt ou para selecionar o arquivo de filme de
114. ange the software The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use which is precisely where it is most unacceptable Therefore we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products If such problems arise substantially in other domains we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL as needed to protect the freedom of users Finally every program is threatened constantly by software patents States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on general purpose computers but in those that do we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary To prevent this the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non free The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow TERMS AND CONDITIONS 0 Definitions This License refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License Copyright also means copyright like laws that apply to other kinds of works such as semiconductor masks The Program refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License Each licensee is addressed as you Licensees and recipients may be individuals or organizations To modify a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission other tha
115. antes externos home theater e Alto falante TV Utilizado para ouvir o som dos alto falantes da TV Caso voc selecione Alto falante Ext no menu Selecionar Alto falante as configura es de som ser o limitadas Portugu s 25 Os bot es de volume e MUTE n o funcionam quando Selecionar Alto falante estiver definida como Alto falante Ext Defina o volume no seu home theater Audio externo Optico E D externo para o Alto falantes internos da TV SETA CE SaT RF AV Componente PC HDMI RF AV Componente PC HDMI Alto falante da TV Sa da do alto falante Sa da do alto falante Alto falantes z externos Mudo Saida do alto falante Video sem Sinal Mudo Mudo Q Sele o de som Principal Sub Quando o recurso PIP estiver ativado voc pode ouvir o som da subtela PIP Voc poder selecionar essa op o quando PIP estiver configurado como Ligado A Pressione o bot o TOOLS para exibir o menu Ferramentas Tamb m poss vel definir o som da subtela selecionando Configura o PIP Sele o do Som Restaurar Padr es QU Restaura o de som Restaurar Tudo Rest o Modo de Som Cancelar poss vel restaurar as configura es de som aos padr es de f brica Selecione as op es de restaura o de som Rest o Modo de Som Os valores do Modo de Som atual retornam s configura es Restaurar Tudo Resto Modo de Som padr o 4 gt Mover Entrar O Retornar E Conectando os fo
116. ar a tomada HDMI IN3 DVI IN a Frequ ncia horizontal Frequ ncia vertical ASA Polaridade Modo Resolu o KHz Hz Frequ ncia MHz Sincr HIV IBM 640 x 350 31 469 70 086 25 175 720 x 400 31 469 70 087 28 322 l 640 x 480 35 000 66 667 30 240 l MAC 832 x 624 49 726 74 551 57 284 l 1152 x 870 68 681 75 062 100 000 l 720 x 576 35 910 59 950 32 750 1152 x 864 53 783 59 959 81 750 VESA CVT 1280 x 720 44 772 59 855 74 500 1280 x 720 56 456 74 777 95 750 1280 x 960 75 231 74 857 130 000 l 640 x 480 31 469 59 940 25 175 l 640 x 480 37 861 72 809 31 500 l 640 x 480 37 500 75 000 31 500 l 800 x 600 37 879 60 317 40 000 800 x 600 48 077 72 188 50 000 800 x 600 46 875 75 000 49 500 1024 x 768 48 363 60 004 65 000 l 1024 x 768 56 476 70 069 75 000 l 1024 x 768 60 023 75 029 78 750 VESA DMT 1152 x 864 67 500 75 000 108 000 1280 x 1024 63 981 60 020 108 000 1280 x 1024 79 976 75 025 135 000 1280 x 800 49 702 59 810 83 500 1280 x 800 62 795 74 934 106 500 1280 x 960 60 000 60 000 108 000 1360 x 768 47 712 60 015 85 500 1440 x 900 55 935 59 887 106 500 1440 x 900 70 635 74 984 136 750 1680 x 1050 65 290 59 954 146 250 l 1280 x 720 52 500 70 000 89 040 VESAGTF 1280 x 1024 74 620 70 000 128 943 y VESA DMT DTV CEA 1920 x 1080p 67 500 60 000 148 500 E Configura o da TV com o seu PC Predefini o Pressione o b
117. ara ir se o de chave de sele o 2 Pressione o bot o lt ou gt para selecionar um padr o de classifica o 3 Pressione o bot o Y ou ENTERL para ir se o de lista de grupo 4 Pressione o bot o gt Reproduzir Os arquivos do grupo selecionado come ar o a ser reproduzidos Ou 1 Selecione um tipo de ordena o e em seguida na se o de lista de arquivos selecione os arquivos contidos no grupo desejado Para navegar para o grupo anterior pr ximo pressione o bot o lt lt REW ou gt gt FF 2 Pressione o bot o TOOLS 3 Pressione o bot o A ou Y para selecionar Repr grupo atual e em seguida pressione o bot o ENTER Ls Os arquivos de m sica do grupo de classifica o incluindo o arquivo selecionados s o reproduzidos Reprodu o dos arquivos de m sica selecionados 1 Pressione o bot o Y para selecionar a se o de lista de arquivos 2 Pressione o bot o lt ou gt para selecionar o arquivo de m sica desejado 3 Repita a opera o acima para selecionar v rios arquivos de m sica O Y exibido esquerda do arquivo de m sica selecionado Para cancelar a sele o de todos os arquivos selecionados pressione o bot o TOOLS e selecione Desmarcar Tudo 4 Pressione o bot o gt Reproduzir ENTER Ls Os arquivos selecionados ser o reproduzidos Portugu s 49 il Menu de op o de reprodu o de m sica Menu de op
118. arm window appears the Media Contents are not played To turn off the media contents transmission from the mobile phone set Media to Off in Setup of the Home Network Center The contents may not be played on the TV depending on their resolution and format Media play control buttons Button Operations e Move the cursor and select an item lt gt e While playing a movie file Skip forwards or backwards through the movie file e Pressing the ENTERL lt button during play pauses the play ENTERLS e Pressing the ENTERL lt button during pause resumes the play RETURN Return to the previous menu TOOLS Run various functions from the Photo Music and Movie menus INFO Show file information EXIT Stop Media Play mode and Returns to TV mode The ENTERL lt and lt gt buttons may not work depending on the type of media content Using the mobile device you can control playing media For details refer to each user s guide English 77 RECOMMENDATIONS E Troubleshooting If the TV seems to have a problem first try this list of possible problems and solutions If none of these troubleshooting tips apply call Samsung customer service at 1 800 SAMSUNG Problem Possible Solution Poor picture Try another channel Adjust the antenna Check all wire connections Poor sound quality No picture or sound Try another channel Adjust the antenna Try another channel Pr
119. at may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law No Surrender of Others Freedom If conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not convey it at all For example if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program Use with the GNU Affero General Public License Notwithstanding any other provision of this License you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work and to convey the resulting work The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License section 13 concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such 14 Revised Versions of this License The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time Such new versions wil
120. ation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee E END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms To do so attach the following notices to the program It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found lt one line to give the program s name and a brief idea of what it does gt Copyright C lt year gt lt name of author gt This program is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 3 of the License or at your option any later version This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Pub
121. ay give you additional or different permissions However no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version 15 Disclaimer of Warranty THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 16 Limitation of Liability IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES 17 Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16 If the disclaimer of warranty and limit
122. azer com que o PC funcione como um servidor DLNA na rede Para procedimentos detalhados sobre como usar o menu DLNA consulte as instru es de Media Play 1 Pressione o bot o MEDIA P no controle remoto para exibir o menu DLNA 2 Pressione o bot o lt ou gt para selecionar um icone Photo Music Movie Setup e em seguida pressione ENTER L Para sair do modo DLNA pressione o bot o MEDIA P no controle remoto O DLNA n o oferece suporte s fun es a seguir Fun es de m sica de fundo e configura es de m sica de fundo Classifica o de arquivos por prefer ncia nas pastas de fotos m sicas e filmes Alterar informa es de grupo Afun o Copiar Excluir Afungao Remover com Seguran a Atecla REW FF lt b funciona enquanto um filme exibido Fun o de reprodu o continua de filme Retomar a reprodu o A fun o Skip pode n o funcionar com determinados formatos como asf e mkv Divx DRM multi audio com legenda incorporada n o suportado O Samsung PC Share manager deve ser permitido pelo programa de firewall do seu PC A fun o Pular teclas lt P gt ou Pausar pode n o funcionar enquanto um filme estiver sendo reproduzido para o DLNA de outros fabricantes dependendo das informa es de conte do correspondentes O tempo de reprodu o pode n o ser exibido enquanto um filme for reproduzido ES Portugu s 60 ANYNET F Conectando Dispo
123. bre o dia desejado e o indicador w ser exibido Defina diretamente a hora e os minutos pressionando os bot es num ricos no controle remoto Desligamento Autom tico Ao definir o temporizador como Ligado sua TV ser desligada se voc n o operar o controle durante as pr ximas 3 horas ap s o cron metro t lo ligado Esta fun o est dispon vel somente no modo temporizador Ligado e impede o superaquecimento que pode ocorrer se a TV permanecer ligada por muito tempo Portugu s 30 al Conex o de Rede poss vel definir o protocolo de Internet para que voc se comunique com as v rias redes conectadas Q Conex o de Rede Cabo Conex o de LAN para ambiente DHCP Os procedimentos para configura o de uma rede DHCP s o descritos a seguir Como o endere o IP a m scara de sub rede o gateway e o DNS s o alocados automaticamente quando DHCP selecionado voc n o precisa inseri los manualmente 1 Conecte a porta LAN no painel traseiro da TV ao modem externo com um cabo de rede 2 Conecte a porta do modem na parede ao modem externo com um cabo de modem Porta do modem na parede Modem externo Painel traseiro da TV ADSL VDSLITV a cabo masa E Cabo do modem Cabo de rede Wn aa poss vel conectar a LAN por meio de um distribuidor roteador Porta do modem na parede Modem externo Painel traseiro da TV ADSLIVDSLITV a cabo Distribuidor de I
124. by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation Moreover your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License for any work from that copyright holder and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10 Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer to peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance However nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or propagating a covered work you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients Each time you convey a covered work the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors to
125. by works containing it or c Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version or d Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material or e Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names trademarks or service marks or f Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material or modified versions of it with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors All other non permissive additional terms are considered further restrictions within the meaning of section 10 If the Program as you received it or any part of it contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction you may remove that term If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section you must place in the relevant source files a statement of the additional terms that a
126. c Play Option Men 91 m Sorting the Movie List aod m Movie List Option Menu 52 m Playing a Movie File 152 m Movie Play Option Menu 95 m Using the Setup Menu 2 al Symbol Note One Touch Button TOOL Button Press English 1 SETTING UP YOUR TV al List of Features Adjustable picture settings that can be stored in the TV s memory Automatic timer to turn the TV on and off A special sleep timer Excellent Digital Interface amp Networking With a built in HD digital tuner non subscription HD broadcasts can be viewed with no Cable Box Satellite receiver Set Top Box needed HDMI DVI connection of your PC to this TV Excellent Picture Quality SRS TruSurround HD provides a virtual surround system Media Play Allows you to play music files pictures and movies saved on a USB or DLNA device Internet TV You can use various internet services and view useful information and entertaining content Home Network Center Allows you to configure a mobile message server or a DLNA media render Accessories Please make sure the following items are included with your LCD TV If any items are missing contact your dealer The items color and shape may vary depending on the model eo MB c Remote Control amp Batteries Power Cord Cover Bottom Cleaning Cloth AAA x 2 c g l Es q W Program CD Stand Screw M4 X L16 Warranty Card Safety Guide Holder Wire Cable Depending on the model English
127. c is played back BGM Mode Mood Selected File Shuffle You can select a mode to use for the background music BGM Mood Energetic Rhythmical Sad Exciting Calm Music with the mood you selected is set as the background music If you set BGM Mode to Mood you can select a mood Select Music File 0 File s Selected Only the selected music file is set as the background music If you set BGM Mode to Selected File you can select a music file Q Picture Setting Sound Setting You can select the picture and sound settings Q Information The photo file information is displayed Q Safe Remove You can remove the device safely from the TV English 47 E Sorting the Music List You can sort music files in the Music List by a particular standard 1 Press the MEDIA P button 2 Press the lt or gt button to select Music then press the ENTER Lg button 3 Press the A button to move to the Sort key Section 4 Press the lt or gt button to select a sorting standard Basic View Title Artist Mood Genre Folder Preference 7 The Music files are sorted according to the newly selected sorting standard 5 Press the Y button to move to the File List Section Press the ENTER L button to start playing music in the order selected by the user To move to the previous next group press the lt lt REW or gt gt FF button Music information is automatically set The mood information extracted from
128. canal digital poss vel selecionar esta fun o S poss vel selecionar um dos idiomas que est o sendo transmitidos U Som de V rias Faixas MTS apenas para canais anal gicos A Pressione o bot o TOOLS para exibir o menu Tools Tamb m poss vel definir um som multi track selecionando Ferramentas Som de V rias Faixas Mono Selecione para canais transmitidos em mono ou se houver algum problema na recep o do sinal est reo Est reo Selecione para canais transmitidos em est reo SAP Selecione para ouvir o Programa de udio separado geralmente trata se da tradu o de um idioma estrangeiro Som de V rias Faixas est dispon vel apenas no modo TV anal gica Dependendo do programa espec fico sendo transmitido poss vel ouvir nos modos Mono Est reo ou SAP Q Volume Autom tico Desligado Ligado Cada esta o transmissora tem a sua condi o pr pria de sinal e n o f cil ajustar o volume sempre que se muda de canal Este recurso permite ajustar automaticamente o volume do canal desejado diminuindo a sa da de som quando o sinal de modula o estiver alto ou aumentando a sa da de som quando o sinal de modula o estiver baixo Q Selecionar Alto falante Quando voc assistir TV com ele conectado a um home theater desligue os alto falantes da TV para que voc possa ouvir melhor o som que sai dos alto falantes do home theater externo e Alto falante Ext Utilizado para ouvir o som dos alto fal
129. changed later on It can be different links for special countries English 71 TERRA WIDGETS In addition the widgets gallery enables you to install services with content provided by Terra ill Weather Forecast Widget You can use your TV to view the Weather Forecast for various cities You can view weekly and daily forecasts and select your favourite cities Q Weekly Forecast e You can view the weekly forecast for each of your favourite cities e After selecting this option use the A and Y buttons to move between cities O Daily Forecast e You can view the daily forecast for each of your 7 favourite cities e After selecting this option use the A and Y buttons to move between days Q Changing your Favourite Cities e The Weather Forecast widget lets you view the weekly and daily forecasts for 7 favourite cities The shipped configuration comes with a group of 7 predefined cities To change this configuration go to Favourite Cities First delete the number of cities that you want to change if the number is less than 7 it is not necessary to delete any Mover C Selecionar O Retorn Use the A V lt and gt buttons to navigate on this screen When you press the List of Cities button you will see a list from which you can select new cities Choose the city from the alphabetical list Press the ENTER button on the letter you want Press ENTER on the name of the city to select it Use the lt but
130. cifica es do kit de montagem na parede VESA Instale o seu suporte de parede em uma parede s lida e perpendicular ao ch o Se a fixa o for feita em algum outro material construtivo entre em contato com o revendedor mais pr ximo Se instalado em um teto ou uma parede com inclina o ele poder cair e cS ocasional algum dano pessoal grave gt Ea Fam lia de Especif VESA E so produto polegadas AxB Parafuso Padr o Quantidade 19 22 1 9 00 x 100 M4 23 29 200 x 100 30 40 200 x 200 M6 a 46 55 400 x 400 57 70 800 x 400 M8 80 1400 x 800 42 50 400 x 400 58 63 600 x 400 iain 70 800 x 400 vg 4 80 1400 x 800 30 39 200 x 200 M6 40 52 400 x 400 LFD 4 55 70 800 x 400 M8 70 1400 x 800 As medidas padr o para kits de montagem na parede s o mostradas na tabela acima Ao adquirir o nosso kit para montagem na parede acompanham o produto um manual de instala o detalhado e todas as pe as necess rias N o use parafusos mais compridos do que as medidas Padr o pois eles podem danificar a parte interna do conjunto da TV Para montagens em paredes que n o estejam em conformidade com essas especifica es VESA de parafuso Padr o o comprimento dos parafusos pode ser diferente dependendo das especifica es de cada uma delas N o use parafusos que n o estejam em conformidade com as especifica es VESA de parafuso padr o N
131. cionado Apenas ap s definir o Anynet HDMI CEC como Ligado no menu Aplicativos o menu Lista de Dispositivos sera exibido A mudan a para o dispositivo selecionado pode demorar at 2 minutos N o poss vel cancelar a opera o durante a opera o de mudan a O tempo necess rio para procurar os dispositivos depende da quantidade de dispositivos conectados Quando a busca por dispositivos estiver conclu da o n mero de dispositivos encontrados n o exibido Embora a TV automaticamente busque a lista de dispositivos quando a TV ligada com o bot o Power os dispositivos conectados TV podem nem sempre ser exibidos automaticamente na lista de dispositivos Pressione o bot o vermelho para pesquisar pelo dispositivo conectado 7 Se voc selecionou o modo de entrada externa pressionando o bot o SOURCE n o ser poss vel utilizar a fun o Anynet Certifique se de mudar para um dispositivo Anynet utilizando Lista de Dispositivos Mover Ls Entrar O Retornar SSS 5 Menu Anynett O menu Anynet muda de acordo com o tipo e o estado dos dispositivos Anynet conectados TV Menu Anynet Descri o Ver TV O modo Anynet muda a TV para o modo de transmiss o Lista de dispositivos Exibe a lista de dispositivos Anynet nome dispositivo MENU Exibe os menus de dispositivos conectados Por exemplo se um gravador de DVD estiver conectado o menu de disco do gravador de DVD ser
132. com o uso de PBC Selecione uma PBC Configura o de bot o Pressione E anena N do ponto de acesso AP 1 o bot o PBC no AP Access Point em 2 minutos e aguarde a conex o A Conex o com o uso de PIN Selecione um PIN N mero de identifica o pessoal Pressione OK depois de inserir o c digo Pin da TV no acesso Ser exibida uma mensagem com o c digo PIN Digite o C digo PIN no WET COR aC ARS C digo PIN xxxxxxxx dispositivo AP em at 2 minutos Selecione OK e aguarde a conex o Tente novamente caso a opera o de conex o n o funcione 7 Quando a conex o n o for estabelecida embora tenha tentado novamente reinicie o ponto de acesso Consulte um manual de cada ponto de acesso Cancelar Conex o usando uma Chave de Seguran a Ao selecionar Chave de Seguran a Configura o de Rede sem fio ser exibida a janela para digita o Digite a chave de seguran a e pressione o bot o PARMIE Azul O N mero Tente novamente caso a opera o de conex o n o funcione Mover 0 9 N mero Cs Entrar O Retornar Configura o de Rede sem fio Selecionar uma rede e Sea Chave de Seguran a n o est definida Quando a configura o de seguran a de um AP que oferece suporte a WPS NENHUMA poss vel selecionar PBC PIN Sem Seguran a Sem Seguran a capaz de conectar ao AP diretamente sem o uso da fun o WPS O processo de PBC PIN o mesmo que o apresentado acima Consulte caso a Chave
133. d The message Connecting to Anynet device appears on the screen You cannot use the remote control when you are configuring Anynett or switching to a view mode Use the remote control when the Anynet setting or switching to view mode is complete The Anynet device does not play You cannot use the play function when Plug amp Play is in progress The connected device is not displayed Check whether or not the device supports Anynet functions Check whether or not the HDMI 1 3 cable is properly connected Check whether Anynett HDMI CEC is set to On in the Anynet setup menu Search Anynet devices again You can connect an Anynett device using the HDMI 1 3 cable only Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet functions If it is terminated by an abnormal situation such as disconnecting the HDMI cable or power cord or a power failure please repeat the device scan The TV program cannot be recorded Check whether the antenna jack on the recording device is properly connected The TV sound is not output through the receiver Connect the optical cable between TV and the receiver English 65 CONTENT LIBRARY E Using the Content Library The Content Library allows you to enjoy various content on your TV You can use the default Media Play USB amp DLNA content stored in the TV memory or you can enjoy new content using a USB device or via the GE ga Internet E Conten
134. d as thumbnail images Current Device Shows the currently selected device name Press the Red button to select a device e Red Device button Selects a connected device Help Items e Green Favorites Setting button Changes the Favorites Setting for the selected file Press this button repeatedly until the desired value appears e Yellow Select button Selects file from the file list Selected files are marked with a symbol 4 Press the Yellow button again to cancel a file selection e TOOLS Tools button Displays the option menus The option menu changes according to the current status O Item Selection Information Shows the number of files that are selected by pressing the Yellow button ooo English 42 E Sorting the Photo List You can sort photos in the Photo List by a particular standard 1 Press the MEDIA P button 2 Press the lt or gt button to select Photo then press the ENTER C button 3 Press the A button to move to the Sort key Section 4 Press the lt or gt button to select a sorting standard Basic View Timeline Color Folder Preference The photos are sorted according to the newly selected sorting standard 5 Press the Y button to move to the File List Section Press the gt Play ENTERLS button to start the Slide Show in the order you selected To move to the previous next group press the lt lt REW or gt gt FF button Z Photo information is automatically
135. da TV Autoriza o telefone celular Recusado Bloqueia o telefone celular D Retornar I Sair Excluir Exclui o telefone celular da lista Essa fun o simplesmente exclui o nome correspondente da lista Caso o dispositivo m vel exclu do seja ligado ou tente se conectar TV ele poder ser exibido na lista Q Configura o Mensagem Ligado Desligado poss vel determinar se a fun o de mensagem recebimentos de chamadas conte do de mensagens de texto e compromissos agendados no celular deve ser usada ou n o ETERN Centro de Rede Dom stica Mensag M dia Ligado Desligado Eri M dia M dia poss vel selecionar se a fun o de reprodu o de conte do v deos fotos m sicas Nome da TV do celular deve ser usada ou n o Nome da TV poss vel definir o nome da TV para que ela seja facilmente encontrada no dispositivo SWEET A Je m vel Caso selecione Ent usu rio poss vel digitar o nome da TV utilizando o OSK On Screen Keyboard Portugu s 74 fl Utiliza o da fun o de mensagens Ao utilizar essa fun o poss vel exibir recebimentos de chamadas conte do de mensagens de texto e compromissos agendados no telefone celular atrav s da janela de alarme enquanto voc assiste a TV 2 2 Exibi o de mensagens Para desativar essa janela de alarme de Mensag defina Mensag como Deslig em Setup do Cent Rede Dom stica A janela de alarme exibida por 20 segundos
136. dates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network Corresponding Source conveyed and Installation Information provided in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented and with an implementation available to the public in source code form and must require no special password or key for unpacking reading or copying Additional Terms Additional permissions are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License to the extent that they are valid under applicable law If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program that part may be used separately under those permissions but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions 10 When you convey a copy of a covered work you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy or from any part of it Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work You may place additiona
137. de Seguran a j est definida Tente novamente caso a opera o de conex o n o funcione sson Mover C Entrar O Retornar Portugu s 35 Ad hoc poss vel conectar a um dispositivo m vel sem um ponto de acesso com o Adaptador de rede sem fio Samsung atrav s do uso de uma rede P2P par a par Como conectar nova Ad hoc 1 Escolha Select a network Uma lista de dispositivos ser exibida 2 Ainda na lista de dispositivos pressione o bot o azul no controle remoto ou selecione Ad hoc A mensagem The existing network system may have limited O sistema de rede existente pode ter funcionalidade functionality Do you want to change the network connection limitada Deseja alterar a liga o de rede ser exibida 3 Digite o Network Name SSID gerado e a Chave de Seguran a no dispositivo que deseja conectar Como conectar a um dispositivo Ad hoc existente 1 Escolha Select a network Uma lista de dispositivos ser exibida 2 Selecione o dispositivo que deseja na lista de Dispositivos 3 Caso a chave de seguran a tenha sido aplicada digite a novamente Caso a rede n o funcione normalmente verifique Nome de Rede SSID e Chave de Seguran a novamente Caso a Chave de Seguran a esteja incorreta ela pode ser a raz o do mau funcionamento Configura o de Rede sem fio Configura o Autom tica Caso deseje conectar o AP ele deve oferecer suporte a DHCP Apenas dispositivos que CRE ES
138. de alarme for exibida o M dia Conte do n o ser reproduzido Para desligar a transmiss o de conte do de m dia do telefone celular defina M dia como Deslig em Setup do Cent Rede Dom stica O conte do pode n o ser reproduzido na TV dependendo de sua resolu o e formato Bot es de controle de reprodu o de m dia Bot o Opera es e Move o cursor e seleciona um item lt gt e Ao reproduzir um arquivo de filme Avance ou retroceda no arquivo de filme em intervalos de 10 segundos e Pressione o bot o ENTER Ls durante a reprodu o para pausar ENTERLS A E free e Pressione o bot o ENTER Ls durante a pausa para reiniciar a reprodu o RETURN Voltar ao menu anterior TOOLS Executar v rias fun es dos menus de foto m sica e filme INFO Exibir informa es do arquivo EXIT Interrompe o modo Media Play e retorna ao modo TV Os bot es ENTER Ls e lt gt podem n o funcionar dependendo do tipo de conte do de m dia poss vel controlar a m dia em reprodu o utilizando o dispositivo m vel Para mais detalhes consulte o manual de usu rio do produto Portugu s 76 RECOMENDA ES E Solu o de problemas Se a TV aparentar ter algum problema experimente primeiro verificar esta lista de poss veis problemas e solu es Se nenhuma dessas dicas de solu o de problemas se aplicar ao seu caso entre em contato com o centro de atendimento ao cliente Samsung
139. de prejudicar sua audi o Voc n o ouvir o som dos alto falantes quando conectar os fones de ouvido a TV Z O volume do fone de ouvido e da TV s o ajustados separadamente DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL Conecta a um componente de udio digital tal como um receptor de home theater SERVICE Conector apenas para manuten o AUDIO OUT R AUDIO L Conecta as saidas de audio ao amplificador home theater COMPONENT IN 1 2 Conecta um componente de audio video TE Portugu s 4 O AVIN 14 2 VIDEO R AUDIO L Entradas de video e audio para dispositivos externos como uma filmadora ou um video cassete USB1 HDD USB2 Conector para atualiza es de software e reprodu o de m dia etc poss vel conectar se a uma rede Samsung sem fio utilizando o Adaptador Infolink sem fio vendido separadamente Conector para atualiza es de software Utilize o controle remoto at aproximadamente 7 metros de dist ncia da TV Pode acontecer do funcionamento do controle remoto ser alterado por luz clara A cor e o formato do produto podem variar dependendo do modelo O POWER Liga e desliga a TV O BOT ES NUM RICOS Pressione para mudar o canal O Pressione para selecionar mais canais digitais transmitidos pela mesma esta o Por exemplo para selecionar o canal 54 3 pressione 54 E e ent o 3 O MUTE x Pressione para interromper temporariamente o som vOL Pressione para a
140. deo de modo a fornecer o efeito de filtro de azul utilizado para ajustar a cor e o matiz de equipamentos de v deo tais como DVD players home theaters etc Ao usar esta fun o poss vel definir a cor e o matiz de acordo com os valores adequados ao n vel de sinal de cada dispositivo de v deo usando os padr es de barra de cores vermelho verde azul ciano magenta amarelo sem a utiliza o de um filtro de azul adicional Modo Somente Azul est dispon vel quando o modo de imagem definido como Filme ou Padr o Restaurar Imagem Restaurar modo de imagem Cancelar Restaura todas as configura es de imagem para os valores padr o Rest o Modo de Imagem Os valores do Modo de Imagem atual retornam s configura es padr o Portugu s 22 i Visualiza o do PIP Picture in Picture poss vel usar o recurso PIP para assistir o sintonizador de TV e outra fonte externa de video simultaneamente Este produto tem um sintonizador interno que n o permite ao PIP funcionar no mesmo modo Veja Ajustes PIP abaixo para obter mais detalhes A Pressione o bot o TOOLS para exibir o menu Ferramentas Voc tamb m poder definir as configura es relacionadas ao PIP selecionando Configura es PIP Se selecionar o som de imagem PIP consulte as instru es Menu de Som consulte a p gina 25 26 Defini es do PIP Imagem principal Subimagem Componente 2 HDMI1 HDMI2 HDMI3 DVI HDMI4 TV PC
141. dere o MAC do dispositivo usado para conex o com a Internet pela primeira vez e autenticar o endere o MAC toda vez que voc se conectar internet sua TV pode n o poder se conectar internet porque o endere o MAC difere do endere o do dispositivo PC Neste caso solicite ao provedor os procedimentos para conectar outros dispositivos que n o o PC como a TV Internet Se o provedor de internet necessitar de um ID ou senha para se conectar internet rede sua TV pode n o conseguir se conectar internet Neste caso voc deve inserir seu ID ou senha quando se conectar internet com um distribuidor de internet roteador A conex o com a internet pode n o ser bem sucedida devido a um problema de firewall Neste caso entre em contato com seu provedor de internet Se voc n o conseguir se conectar internet mesmo seguindo os procedimentos passados pelo provedor entre em contato com um Centro de servi o Samsung Electronics Configura o de Rede a cabo Configura o autom tica Se voc conectar o cabo de rede e houver suporte a DHCP as configura es de protocolo de internet IP ser o feitas automaticamente Configura o de Rede a cabo Configura o de Rede Config Autom tica 1 Defina Tipo de Rede como Cabo Pd 2 Selecione Configura o de Rede a Cabo 3 Defina Configura o de Rede como Config Autom tica O IP configurado automaticamente 4 Selecione Network Test para verificar a conect
142. dispositivo externo estiver conectado TV verifique se o Modo Jogo est como Ligado Defina o Modo Jogo como Desligado e conecte os dispositivos externos Se o Modo Jogo estiver Ligado O Modo de Imagem muda automaticamente para Padr o e n o pode ser alterado O Modo de Som muda automaticamente para Personalizado e n o pode ser alterado Ajuste o som usando o equalizador Afun o Restaurar som est ativada Selecione a fun o Restaurar depois de ajustar as configura es do equalizador se desejar restaurar as configura es de f brica QU BD Wise Ligado Desligado Fornece uma tima qualidade de imagem para produtos SAMSUNG DVD Blu ray e Home Theater com suporte a BD Wise Voc poder desfrutar de uma imagem mais rica ao utiliz lo conectado na TV Samsung Conecte produtos SAMSUNG que t m BD Wise com o uso de um cabo HDMI BD Wise est dispon vel no modo HDMI Quando o BD Wise est definido como Ligado o Modo de Imagem alterado automaticamente para a resolu o m xima QO Tipo de Rede Configura o de Rede Para procedimentos detalhados sobre as op es de configura o consulte as instru es Configurando a Rede consulte a p gina 33 35 Q Closed Caption mensagens de texto na tela Closed Caption Ligado Desligado poss vel ligar ou desligar a fun o Closed Caption Caso a fun o Closed Caption n o esteja dispon vel as mensagens n o ser o exibidas na tela Pr
143. distribution and modification follow TERMS AND CONDITIONS 0 Definitions This License refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License Copyright also means copyright like laws that apply to other kinds of works such as semiconductor masks The Program refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License Each licensee is addressed as you Licensees and recipients may be individuals or organizations To modify a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission other than the making of an exact copy The resulting work is called a modified version of the earlier work or a work based on the earlier work A covered work means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program To propagate a work means to do anything with it that without permission would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy Propagation includes copying distribution with or without modification making available to the public and in some countries other activities as well To convey a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies Mere interaction with a user through a computer network with no transfer of a copy is not conveying An interactive user interface displays Appropriate
144. do not display Appropriate Legal Notices your work need not make them do so A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium is called an aggregate if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation s users beyond what the individual works permit Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate 6 Conveying Non Source Forms You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5 provided that you also convey the machine readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License in one of these ways a Convey the object code in or embodied in a physical product including a physical distribution medium accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange b Convey the object code in or embodied in a physical product including a physical distribution medium accompanied by a written offer valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model to give anyone who possesses the object code either 1 a copy of the Corresponding So
145. duced readjust the picture so that it is aligned on Tn the center of screen Image Reset PC Position Adjust the PC s screen positioning if it does not fit the TV screen Press the A or Y button to adjusting the Vertical Position Press the lt or gt button to adjust the Horizontal Position Move 3 Enter O Return Image Reset You can replace all image settings with the factory default values English 24 E Sound Menu Q Mode Standard Music Movie Clear Voice Custom A Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu You can also set the sound mode by Mode selecting Tools gt Sound Mode Sonia e Standard Selects the normal sound mode ena omer e Music Emphasizes music over voices sae d my e Movie Provides the best sound for movies Speaker Select TV Speaker e Clear Voice Emphasizes voice over other sounds e Custom Recalls your customized sound settings Q Equalizer The sound settings can be adjusted to suit your personal preference e Mode Selects the sound mode among the predefined settings e Balance L R Adjusts the balance between the right and left speaker e 100Hz 300Hz 1KHz 3KHz 10KHz Bandwidth Adjustment To adjust the level of different bandwidth frequencies e Reset Resets the equalizer settings to the default values Q SRS TruSurround HD Off On TruSurround HD is a patented SRS technology that solves the problem of playing 5 1 multichannel content over two speakers
146. e Voc tamb m pode mudar a velocidade do slide show pressionando o bot o lt lt e ae REW ou gt gt FF durante a apresenta o de slides Q Efeito Slide Show Voc pode selecionar o efeito de transi o de tela usado na apresenta o de slides Nenhum Fade1 Fade2 Escurecer Espiral Xadrez Linear Escada Apagar Aleat rio Esta fun o est dispon vel somente durante uma apresenta o de slides Portugu s 45 Girar Voc pode girar fotos salvas em um dispositivo de mem ria USB Sempre que pressionar o bot o lt 4 ela gira em 270 180 90 e 0 Sempre que pressionar o bot o gt ela gira em 90 180 270 e 0 O arquivo girado n o salvo Q Zoom Voc pode ampliar fotos salvas em um dispositivo de mem ria USB x1 x2 gt x4 Para mover a imagem ampliada da foto pressione o bot o ENTER Ls e em seguida pressione os bot es A V lt gt Observe que a imagem ampliada menor do que o tamanho de tela original a fun o de modifica o de localidade n o funciona O arquivo ampliado n o salvo O Musica de fundo Voc pode selecionar m sica de fundo ao assistir uma apresenta o de slides Para utilizar este recurso devem existir arquivos de m sica e foto armazenados no dispositivo USB Carregamento de arquivos de m sica necess rio para alterar o modo BGM Reproduza arquivos de m sica na categoria m sica para carregar
147. e List Section select the files contained in the desired group To move to the previous next group press the lt lt REW or gt gt FF button Press the TOOLS button Press the A or Y button to select Play Current Group then press the ENTER L lt button The music files in the sorting group including the selected file are played Playing the selected music files 1 2 3 Press the Y button to select the File List Section Press the lt or gt button to select the desired music file Repeat the above operation to select multiple music files The Y appears to the left of the selected music file To deselect all selected files press the TOOLS button and select Deselect All Press the gt Play ENTER Ls button The selected files will be played English 50 E Music Play Option Menu Music Play Option Menu O Repeat Mode On Off You can play music files repeatedly O Picture Setting Sound Setting You can configure the picture and sound settings Move 4p Adjust p Exit Q Information The music file information is displayed Q Safe Remove You can remove the device safely from the TV E Sorting the Movie List You can sort movies in the Movie List by a particular standard 1 Press the MEDIA P button 2 Press the lt or gt button to select Movie then press the ENTER C4 button 3 Press the A button to move to the Sort key Section 4 Press
148. e TV memory You cannot recover a deleted file O Deselect All When at least one file is selected You can deselect all files The Y mark indicating the corresponding file is selected is hidden Q Information The movie file information including the name the size the date modified and the path is displayed GE Press the INFO button to viewing the information INFO A GUIDE QO Safe Remove You can remove the device safely from the TV i Playing a Movie File Playing a movie file 1 Press the Y button to select the File List Section E 00 00 01 00 05 30 2 Pressing the lt or gt button to select a movie file to be played E 3 Press the gt Play ENTER Ls button The selected file is played The selected file is displayed at the top with its playing time The playing duration of a movie file may be displayed as 00 00 00 if its playing time information is not found at the start of the file You can watch exciting gaming multimedia files but the gaming function is not Ea Pause AP inp Tool o Raum supported ES English 52 Supported Subtitle Formats Format Name File extension MPEG 4 time based text ttxt XML HTML SAMI SubRip smi srt string based SubViewer sub string based Micro DVD sub or txt string based Supported Video Formats File Extension Container avi AVI Video Decoder Divx
149. e Yellow button Press the TOOLS button to select Delete or Delete All Delete Selected File The files are deleted You can only delete the files saved in the TV memory You cannot recover a deleted file Q Change Group Info When the Sort key is Mood You can change the mood information of music files The group information of the current file is updated and the file is moved to the new group To change the information of multiple files select files by pressing the Yellow button O Deselect All When at least one file is selected You can deselect all files The Y mark indicating the corresponding file is selected is hidden O Information The music file information including the name the size the date modified and the path is displayed You can view the music file information during Play Current Group using the same procedures Press the INFO button to viewing the information CONTENT 0 Safe Remove Carine You can remove the device safely from the TV English 49 E Playing Music Playing a music file 1 2 3 Press the Y button to select the File List Section Press the lt or gt button to select a music file to be played Press the gt Play ENTER Ls button This menu only shows files with the MP3 file extension Files with other file extensions are not displayed even if they are saved on the same USB device The selected file is displayed at the top with its playing time To adjust
150. e cable box Connect an RF cable between the ANT OUT terminal on the cable box and the B IN terminal on the RF A B switch Connect another cable between the other OUT terminal on the splitter and the A IN terminal on the RF A B switch Connect the last RF cable between the OUT terminal on the RF A B switch and the ANT 2 IN CABLE terminal on the rear of the TV After you have made this connection set the A B switch to the A position for normal viewing Set the A B switch to the B position to view scrambled channels When you set the A B switch to B you will need to tune your TV to the cable box s output channel which is usually channel 3 or 4 English 7 ANT 2 IN CABLE a Connecting a DVD Blu ray player Cable Box Satellite receiver Set Top Box via HDMI This connection can only be made if there is an HDMI Output connector on the external device DVD Blu ray player Cable Box TV Side Panel TV Rear Panel Satellite receiver Set Top Box HOMIIN DVIIN_ Ti or HDMI Cable Not supplied 1 Connect an HDMI Cable between the HDMI IN 1 2 3 DVI IN 4 jack on the TV and the HDMI jack on the DVD Player or Cable Box Satellite receiver Set Top Box What is HDMI HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface is an interface that enables the transmission of digital audio and video signals using a single cable
151. e da cor principal vermelho verde azul Espa o de Cores No modo PC poss vel fazer altera es apenas em Luz de Fundo Contraste e Brilho Modo Padr o E a 3 Luz de Fundo Contraste Brilho Nitidez Cor Matiz Configura es Avan adas a defn 7 ha Mover 4 Ajustar Cs Entrar D Retornar Quando voc faz altera es em Luz de Fundo Contraste Brilho Nitidez Cor ou Matiz Vd Vm o OSD ser ajustado de A energia consumida durante o uso pode ser reduzida de maneira expressiva se o n vel de brilho da imagem for reduzido isto Configura es Avan adas Tom de Preto Desligado Dynamic Contrast M dio Gamma 20 Espa o de Cores Nativo Estabilidade de Branco Tom de Pele 20 Aprim da Margem Ligado Mover Entrar 5 Retornar O espa o de cores uma matriz de cores composta pelas cores vermelho verde e azul Selecione o espa o de cores de sua prefer ncia e experimente as cores mais naturais e Auto O espa o de cores autom tico faz o ajuste autom tico tonalidade de cor mais natural com base em fontes de programas Native O espa o de cores Nativo oferece tonalidades de cores intensas e sofisticadas Personalizado Ajusta a gama de cores de acordo com a sua prefer ncia Portugu s 19 A altera o do valor de ajuste atualizar a tela ajustada As defini es podem ser ajustadas e armazenadas para da entrada da TV Por exemplo se voc tiver um
152. e estar definido como Ligado Quando a fun o Anynet HDMI CEC estiver desativada todas as opera es Ayer Configura o relacionadas ao Anynet estar o desativadas Anynet HDMI CEC Ligado Desligamento Auto Sim Desligamento autom tico N o Sim Configurando um dispositivo Anynet para desligar automaticamente quando a TV desligada A fonte ativa no controle remoto da TV deve ser ajustada TV para que a fun o Anynet Apre Contigura o seja utilizada A DRE oo Se voc definir Desligamento Autom tico para Sim os dispositivos externos conectados Desligamento Auto Sim tamb m ser o desligados quando a TV for desligada Se um dispositivo externo ainda estiver gravando ele pode ou n o ser desligado a Alternando entre dispositivos Anynet 1 Pressione o bot o TOOLS Pressione o bot o ENTER 4 para selecionar Anynett A snee HDMI CEC 2 Pressione o bot o A ou Y para selecionar Lista de Dispositivos e em seguida E pressione ENTER C amp o Ser exibida uma lista com os dispositivos Anynet conectados TV ia Mover 3 Entrar O Retornar Mover Entrar 5 Retornar Ver TV Lista de dispositivos Receiver Desligado Caso voc n o encontre o dispositivo desejado pressione o bot o vermelho para anions procurar dispositivos 3 Pressione o bot o A ou Y para selecionar um dispositivo espec fico e em seguida pressione ENTER L A configura o ser alterada para o dispositivo sele
153. e output given its content constitutes a covered work This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent as provided by copyright law You may make run and propagate covered works that you do not convey without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you or provide you with facilities for running those works provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf under your direction and control on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below Sublicensing is not allowed section 10 makes it unnecessary Protecting Users Legal Rights From Anti Circumvention Law No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996 or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures When you convey a covered work you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is eff
154. e previously adjusted white balance will be reset to the factory defaults Flesh Tone You can emphasize the pink flesh tone in the picture Changing the adjustment value will refresh the adjusted screen Edge Enhancement Off On You can emphasize object boundaries in the picture xvYCC Off On Setting the xvYCC mode to on increases detail and color space when watching movies from an external device ie DVD player connected to the HDMI or Component IN jacks xvYCC is available when the picture mode is set to Movie and the external input is set to HDMI or Component mode English 20 Q Picture Options In PC mode you can only make changes to the Color Tone and Size from among the Picture Options items in Picture Options E Size 16 9 Color Tone Cool Normal Warm1 Warm2 Warm3 Digital NR Auto Warm1 Warm2 or Warm3 is only activated when the picture mode is Movie aaa a Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have connected to an Auto Motion Plus 120 Standard input of the TV Blue Only Mode Off Move Enter O Return Size Occasionally you may want to change the size of the image on your screen Your TV comes with several screen size options each designed to work best with specific types of video input Your cable box satellite receiver may have its own set of screen sizes as well In general though you should view the TV in 16 9 mode as much as possible Alternately you ca
155. e setting you ve chosen set to Activate Off Time Set the hour minute am pm and activate inactivate To activate the timer with the setting you ve chosen set to Activate W Move Adjust C3 Enter O Retum Volume Set the desired volume level Source TV USB TV Memory You can select the TV TV Memory or USB device content to be played when the TV turns on automatically Select TV TV Memory or USB Make sure that an USB device is connected to your TV When there is only one photo file in the USB or the TV Memory the Slide Show will not play Antenna when Source is set to TV Select Air or Cable English 29 Channel when Source is set to TV Select the desired channel Contents when Source is set to USB or TV Memory You can select a folder on the USB Device TV Memory with music or photo files to be played when the TV turns on automatically Z If the folder name is too long the folder can not be selected Ifyou are using two of the same type USB device be sure the folder names are different so the correct USB is read Repeat Select Once Everyday Mon Fri Mon Sat Sat Sun or Manual When Manual is selected press the gt button to select the desired day of the week Press the ENTER C button over the desired day and the Y mark will appear You can set the hour minute and channel by pressing the number buttons on the remote control Auto Power Off When you set the timer on the telev
156. e slides m Menu de op o de apresenta o de slides m Classifica o da lista de m sicas m Menu de op o de lista de m sicas m Reprodu o de m sica m Classifica o da lista de filmes m Menu de op o de reprodu o de m sica m Menu de op o de lista de filmes m Reprodu o de um arquivo de filme m Menu de op o de reprodu o de filme m Utilizando o menu Configura o Z a S mbolo Nota Bot o de um toque Bot o TOOL MEDIA PLAY DLNA m Configura o da Rede DLNA m Instala o do aplicativo DLNA m Uso do aplicativo DLNA m Uso do menu DLNA ANYNET m Conectando Dispositivos Anynet m Configurando o Anynet m Alternando entre dispositivos Anynet miGrava o es eee m Ouvir atrav s do receiver home theater m Solu o de problemas para Anynet CONTENT LIBRARY m Utiliza o da Content Library m Utiliza o do conte do da mem ria da TV m Utilizando o Gerenciamento de conte do INTERNETOTV m Fun es b sicas de Internet TV m Configura o do Internet TV m Utiliza o do servi o InternetOTV m Solu es de problemas do Internet TV m Site de ajuda WIDGETS TERRA m Widget Previs o do Se m Widget Noticias m Widget Ticker CENTRO DE REDE DOMESTICA m Centro de Rede Dom stica m Configurando o Centro de Red m Utiliza o da fun
157. e you press the INFO button If you disconnect the power cord you have to set the clock again Time Caption Clock Mode Network Setup You can set up the current time manually or automatically eee e Auto Set the current time automatically using the time from the digital broadcast cm e Manual Set the current time to a manually specified time 7 Depending on the broadcast station and signal the auto time may not be set correctly If sl me this occurs set the time manually The Antenna or cable must be connected in order to set the time automatically Clock Set You can set the current time manually Move CHEnter O Return This function is only available when Clock Mode is set to Manual You can set the day month year hour and minute directly by pressing the number buttons on the remote control Time Zone Select your time zone This function is only available when Clock Mode is set to Auto Q Sleep Timer The sleep timer automatically shuts off the TV after a preset time 30 60 90 120 150 and 180 minutes A Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu You can also set the sleep timer by selecting Tools Sleep Timer To cancel the Sleep Timer function select Off Q Timer 1 Timer 2 Timer 3 Three different on off timer settings can be made You must set the clock first amet On Time On Time i Set the hour minute am pm and activate inactivate To activate the timer with th
158. eck whether the antenna jack is properly connected to the recording device To properly connect an antenna to a recording device refer to the recording device s users manual ing DVDR DVDR MENU Move Enter D Return Listening through a Receiver Home theater You can listen to sound through a receiver instead of the TV speaker oo 1 Press the TOOLS button Press the ENTER C button to select Anynett HDMI CEC 2 Press the A or Y button to select Receiver Press the lt or gt button to select On or Off Deve int 3 Press the EXIT button to exit Be DVDR INFO If your receiver supports audio only it may not appear in the device list Receiver Off The receiver will work when you have properly connected the optical in jack of the ag receiver to the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL jack of the TV When the receiver home theater is set to On you can hear sound output from the TV s Optical jack When the TV is displaying a DTV air signal the TV will send out 5 1 channel sound to the Home theater receiver When the source is a digital component such as a DVD and is connected to the TV via HDMI only 2 channel sound will be heard from the Home Theater receiver If there is a power interruption to the TV when the Receiver is set to On by disconnecting the power cord or a power failure the Speaker Select may be set to External Speaker when you turn the TV on again Move Enter 5 Return English 6
159. ect the slide show speed This function is available only during a slide show You can also change the speed of the Slide Show by pressing the lt lt REW or gt gt FF button during the Slide Show Q Slide Show Effect You can select the screen transition effect used in the slideshow None Fade Fade2 Blind Spiral Checker Linear Stairs Wipe Random This function is available only during a slide show WU Rotate You can rotate photos saved on a USB memory device Whenever you press the lt button it rotates by 270 180 90 and 0 Whenever you press the gt button it rotates by 90 180 270 and 0 The rotated file is not saved Zoom You can magnify photos saved on a USB memory device x1 x2 gt x4 To move the enlarged photo image press the ENTER Ls button then press the A lt P buttons Note that when the enlarged picture is smaller than the original screen size the location change function doesn t work The enlarged file is not saved English 46 Q Background Music You can select background music when watching a Slide Show To use this feature there must be music and photo files stored on the USB device Loading music files is needed to change BGM mode Play music files in music category to load Background Music Off On e Off Background music is not played e On When the background music is available if you select On the musi
160. ect to a mobile device without an access point through the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter by using a peer to peer network How to connect to new Ad hoc 1 Choose Select a network then a device list is displayed 2 While in the device list press the Blue button on the remote or select Ad hoc The message The existing network system may have limited m E The existing network system may have limited functionality Do you want to change the network connection is functionality Do you want to change the network displayed connection 3 Input the generated Network Name SSID and Security Key into the device you want to connect How to connect an existing Ad hoc device 1 Choose Select a network the device list is displayed 2 Select the device you want in the Device list 3 If security key was applied input the security key again If network doesn t operate normally please check the Network Name SSID and Security Key again If the Security Key is incorrect it may be the reason for the malfunction Wireless Network Setup Auto Setup If you want to connect AP AP should support DHCP Only devices which support Ad hoc mode can be connected without DHCP Internet Protocol Setup Auto Setup 1 Set Network Type to Wireless ein 2 Select Wireless Network Setup Wireless Network Setup 3 Set Internet Protocol Setup to Auto Setup The Internet Protocol is set automatically Select a network through Select a network
161. ected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing against the work s users your or third parties legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures Conveying Verbatim Copies You may convey verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee Conveying Modified Source Versions You may convey a work based on the Program or the modifications to produce it from the Program in the form of source code under the terms of section 4 provided that you also meet all of these conditions a The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it and giving a relevant date b The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7 This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to keep intact all notices
162. ed to Custom and cannot be changed Adjust the sound using the equalizer The Reset Sound function is activated Selecting the Reset function after setting the equalizer resets the equalizer settings to the factory defaults Ss S amp 8S BD Wise gt Off On Provides the optimal picture quality for SAMSUNG DVD Blu ray and Home Theater products which support BD Wise You can enjoy a richer picture when using them connected to this Samsung TV Connect SAMSUNG products that have BD Wise using an HDMI cable BD Wise is available in HDMI mode When the BD Wise set to On the picture mode is automatically changed to the optimal resolution O Network Type Network Setup For detailed procedures on setting up options refer to the Setting the Network instructions refer to pages 33 35 WU Caption On Screen Text Messages Caption Off On You can switch the caption function on or off If captions are not available they will not be displayed on the screen Press the CC button on the remote control to turn the Caption on or off The Caption feature doesn t work in Component HDMI or PC modes Caption Mode You can select the desired caption mode The availability of captions depends on the program being broadcast e CC1 CC4 Text1 Text4 analog channels only The Analog Caption function operates in either analog TV channel mode or when a signal is supplied from an external device to TV Depending on the broadca
163. eived it or any part of it contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction you may remove that term If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section you must place in the relevant source files a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms Additional terms permissive or non permissive may be stated in the form of a separately written license or stated as exceptions the above requirements apply either way Termination You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11 However if you cease all violation of this License then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated a provisionally unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license and b permanently if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation
164. ela mais do que o modo Zoom Ajuste Amplo Amplia a propor o da imagem para que ocupe toda a tela 4 3 Ajusta a imagem para o modo normal 4 3 Screen Fit Use esta fun o para ver a imagem inteira sem cortes quando houver a entrada dos sinais HDMI 720p 1080i 1080p Componente 1080i 1080p ou DTV 1080 ay Zoom2 Mover ia Ajuste Amplo 4 3 Ajuste Tela Quando o modo Duplo mmm ME tiver sido definido no PIP n o ser poss vel definir o tamanho da tela A reten o da imagem tempor ria pode ocorrer ao visualizar uma imagem est tica no aparelho por mais de duas horas Ap s selecionar Zoom1 Zoom2 ou Ajuste Amplo Pressione o bot o gt para selecionar Posi o e em seguida pressione ENTER 4 Pressione o bot o A ou Y para mover a imagem para cima e para baixo Em seguida pressione o bot o ENTERL lt Pressione o bot o para selecionar Tamanho e em seguida pressione ENTER LC Pressione o bot o A ou Y para aumentar ou reduzir o tamanho da imagem no sentido vertical Em seguida pressione o bot o ENTER LS Ap s selecionar Ajuste Tela no modo HDMI 1080i 1080p ou Componente 1080i 1080p talvez seja necess rio centralizar a imagem Pressione o bot o lt ou gt para selecionar Posi o e em seguida pressione ENTER Ls Pressione os bot es A Y lt ou gt para mover a imagem Restaurar Padr es Pressione o bot o lt ou gt para selecionar Restaurar Padr es depois pr
165. ele o da s cidade s pressione o bot o RETORNAR e volte para as previs es semanais e di rias para conferir a mudan a de cidades Portugu s 71 E Widget Noticias Sua TV permite a visualiza o de Noticias em diversos t picos diferentes e Mova a sele o de tipo de not cia com os bot es A e Y para escolher o t pico asma 7 Not cias Titulo e Navegue com os bot es A e Y e pressione ENTER na noticia desejada para leitura do texto completo Mover 4 Selecionar 9 Retornar e Navegue com os bot es A e Y para ler a noticia completa Pressione RETORNAR para voltar ao menu anterior Noticias psc e Dinamo empatam sem gols na Fran a a a partida de volta em Kiev a 16 Com um empate com gols ou o fica para o PSG J o Dinamo avan a s semifinais com um triunfo A equipe classificada edor de Shakhtar e Olympique de Marselha Mover D Retornar il Widget Ticker O widget Ticker re ne as funcionalidades de Not cias e Previs o do Tempo para m ltiplas cidades no mesmo servi o Neste widget a programa o da TV permanece possibilitando ao usu rio continuar assistindo ao seu programa favorito enquanto aproveita mais este recurso da TV e Ao acessar o Ticker inicialmente os t tulos das not cias aparecem embaixo do video e Ao pressionar ENTER a Not cia aparece completa na tela Ao pressionar os bot es lt e gt troca se de not cia Para retornar ao modo normal pres
166. elect a PBC Push Button Configuration Press the PBC Press the PBC button on the access point button on the AP access point within 2minutes and wait for connection Access Point Name AP_1 Connecting by using PIN Select a PIN Personal Identification Number Press OK After input TV s Pin code in the access point s setup 4 The message showing the PIN Code is displayed Input the PIN Code at AP Access Point Name AP_1 PIN Code xxxxxxxx device within 2minutes Select OK and wait for connection 2 Try again if connecting operation doesn t work When the connection is not established although tried again reset the access point Please refer to a manual of each access point Connecting by using Security Key When selecting Security Key the input window is Wireless Network Setup displayed Input the security key and press Blue button Security Key E Try again if connecting operation doesn t work eget Ce te E SS ft E TAM E as EE Move 0 9 Number CF Enter D Return Wireless Network Setup e f Security Key is not set When the security setting of AP that supports WPS is NONE you can select PBC PIN None Security None Security is capable of connecting to AP directly without using WPS function Process of PBC PIN is same as above Refer to if Security Key is already set Try again if connecting operation doesn t work Select a network Move Enter O Return English 35 Ad hoc You can conn
167. en press the ENTER L lt button Anynet devices connected to the TV are listed it ing DVDR If you cannot find a device you want press the red button to scan for devices DVDR MENU DVDR INFO 3 Press the A or Y button to select a particular device and press the ENTER L button It Receiver Off is switched to the selected device Only when you set Anynet HDMI CEC to On in the Application menu the Device List menu appears ES Switching to the selected devices may take up to 2 minutes You cannot cancel the operation during the switching operation The time required to scan for devices is determined by the number of connected devices When the device scan is complete the number of devices found are not displayed Although the TV automatically searches the device list when the TV is turned on via the power button devices connected to Setup Move Enter O Return the TV may not always be automatically displayed in the device list Press the red button to search for the connected device ES If you have selected external input mode by pressing the SOURCE button you cannot use the Anynett function Make sure to switch to an Anynet device by using the Device List Anynett Menu The Anynet menu changes depending on the type and status of the Anynet devices connected to the TV Anynet Menu Description View TV Anynet mode changes to TV broadcast mode Device List device_name MEN
168. eprodu o e voltar lista de filmes lt gt Avangar ou retroceder no arquivo de filme A Y Mover para o primeiro ultimo do arquivo Reproduzir o arquivo no dobro da velocidade Esta fun o pode ser suportada dependendo do codec Reprodu o de um grupo de filmes 1 2 3 4 Pressione o bot o A para ir se o de chave de sele o Pressione o bot o lt ou gt para selecionar um padr o de classifica o Pressione o bot o Y ou ENTER L lt para ir se o de lista de grupo Pressione o bot o gt Reproduzir Somente os arquivos do grupo selecionado come ar o a ser reproduzidos Ou Selecione uma chave de sele o e em seguida na se o de lista de arquivos selecione os arquivos contidos no grupo desejado Para navegar para o grupo anterior pr ximo pressione o bot o lt lt REW ou gt gt FF Pressione o bot o TOOLS Pressione o bot o A ou Y para selecionar Repr grupo atual em seguida pressione o bot o ENTER C Os arquivos de filme do grupo de classifica o incluindo o arquivo selecionados s o reproduzidos Reprodu o dos arquivos de filme selecionados 1 2 3 Pressione o bot o Y para selecionar a se o de lista de arquivos Pressione o bot o lt ou para selecionar o arquivo de m sica desejado Pressione o bot o amarelo A indica o Y exibida esquerda do arquivo de filme selecionado
169. er manual Signal Strength digital channels only Unlike analog channels which can vary in reception quality from snowy to clear digital HDTV channels have either perfect reception quality or you will not receive them at all So unlike analog channels you cannot fine tune a digital channel You can however adjust your antenna to improve the reception of available digital channels If the signal strength meter indicates that the signal is weak physically adjust your antenna to increase the signal strength Continue to adjust the antenna until you find the best position with the strongest signal Q Software Upgrade Samsung may offer upgrades for the TV s firmware in the future These upgrades can be TV Side Panel performed via the TV when it is connected to the Internet or by downloading the new firmware from samsung com to a USB memory device rll Current Version is the software already installed in the TV Alternative Software Backup shows the previous version that will be replaced l Tas Umas gt Software is represented as Year Month Day Version The more recent the date the newer the software version Installing the latest version is recommended ah By USB Insert a USB drive containing the firmware upgrade downloaded from samsung com into the TV Please be careful to not disconnect the power or remove the USB drive while upgrades are being applied The TV will turn off and turn on aut
170. er the one star setting English 43 i Photo List Option Menu 1 Press the MEDIA P button 2 Press the lt or gt button to select Photo then press the ENTER 4 button 3 Press the Y button to move to the File List Section 4 Press the lt or gt button to select the desired photo file E Copy Selecting Multiple Photos E Pio Change Group Info Copy Current Group Press the lt or gt button to select the desired photo file Then press the a Ec Yellow button F Repeat the above operation to select multiple photo files The mark v appears to the selected photo file 5 Press the TOOLS button The option menu changes according to the current status O Slide Show Using this menu you can play a SlideShow using the photo files on the USB memory device O Copy Copy Current Group Copy the selected file When multiple files are selected Select a photo you want to copy Alternatively select multiple files by pressing the Yellow button Press the TOOLS button to select Copy or Copy Current Group Copy the selected file The files on the USB device are saved to the TV memory You can only copy the files saved on the USB device When the TV memory is full files cannot be copied Q Delete Delete All Delete Selected File When multiple files are selected Select a photo to delete Alternatively select multiple files by pressing the Yellow button Press the TOOLS button to select Delete o
171. erived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www opensstl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was
172. ervice Lock Install Service no widget existente e ver a descri o do servi o de widget que n o est instalado No Internet TV poss vel adicionar e usar diversos widgets fornecidos pelo seu provedor de servi os Eles podem variar de acordo com o fornecedor de conte do e Run Service Executa o servi o de widget e Lock Define o bloqueio do servi o e Install Service ou Delete Service Instala ou exclui o servi o de widget Utiliza o do widget do YouTube Voc pode assistir os filmes fornecidos pelo YouTube Se voc possui conta no YouTube grave as informa es de conta usando o Gerenciamento de conta Depois voc pode usar a categoria Meus favoritos i Most Viewed Top Rated uTube seking Justice Decades Later O menu pode ser alterado pelo servico de Web ERA ss Pode haver conte do inapropriado para crian as Nesse caso use a fun o Lock Most Linked Most Respomded em Widget Gallery Featured Portugu s 69 a Solu es de problemas do Internet TV Problema Solu o poss vel Alguns servi os de widget n o funcionam Verifique isso com o provedor de servi os No widget pressione o bot o verde e obtenha informa es de contato ou consulte a ajuda do site para informa es do provedor de servi o de widget Consulte a p gina de Ajuda do site Qual a vantagem de um SSO Se voc criar uma conta e registrar as informa es de login do servi o desejado
173. ess the ENTER C button All files in the photo list will be used for the Slide Show Play Curent Group Copy Current Group Information Safe Remove During the slide show files are displayed in order from the currently shown file The Slide Show progresses in the order sorted in the Photo list Music files can be automatically played during the Slide Show if the Background Music is set to On While a photo list is displayed press the gt Play ENTER C4 button on the remote control to start slide show SlideShow Control Buttons Button Operations ENTERCS Play Pause the Slide Show gt Play the Slide Show 1 Pause the Slide Show E Exit Slide Show and return to the photo list lt p gt Change the SlideShow playing speed TOOLS Run various functions from the Photo menus Playing current group i 2 3 4 5 Press the A button to move to the Sort key Section Press the lt or gt button to select a sorting standard Press the Y button to move to the Group List Section Select a group using the lt and gt buttons Press the gt Play button A slideshow begins with the files of the selected group Alternatively Select a Sort key and then in the File List Section select the photos contained in the desired group To move to the previous next group press the lt lt REW or gt gt FF butt
174. ess the SOURCE button Make sure the TV is plugged in Check the antenna connections No sound or sound is too low at maximum volume First check the volume of units connected to your TV digital broadcasting receiver DVD cable broadcasting receiver VCR etc Then adjust the TV volume accordingly Check the Speaker Select settings Picture rolls vertically Check all wire connections There is a problem with the picture Run the Picture test in the Self diagnostic menu There is a problem with the sound Run the Sound test in the Self diagnostic menu The TV operates erratically Unplug the TV for 30 seconds then try operating it again The TV won t turn on Make sure the wall outlet is working Remote control malfunctions Replace the remote control batteries Clean the upper edge of the remote control transmission window Check the battery terminals Check signal cable message Not Supported Mode message Ensure that the signal cable is firmly connected to the PC source Check the maximum resolution and connected device s Video frequency Compare these values with the data in the Display Modes Digital broadcasting screen problem Please check the digital signal strength and input antenna The image is too light or too dark Adjust the Brightness and Contrast Adjust the Fine tuning Black bars on the screen Make sure the broadcast you
175. essione ENTER L lt A configura o pode ser iniciada HD Alta defini o 16 9 1080i 1080p 1920x1080 720p 1280x720 As defini es podem ser ajustadas separadamente para cada entrada da TV Fonte de entrada Tamanho da imagem ATV AV Componente 480i 480p 16 9 Zoom1 Zoom2 4 3 DTV 1080i Componente 1080i 1080p HDMI 720p 4080 1080P 16 9 4 3 Ajuste Amplo Ajuste a Tela PC 16 9 4 3 Portugu s 21 Digital NR Desligado Baixo M dio Alto Automatico Se o sinal de transmiss o recebido pela TV estiver fraco voc poder ativar o recurso de redu o de ru do digital para ajudar a reduzir qualquer imagem fantasma e est tica na tela Quando o sinal est fraco selecione uma das outras op es at que a melhor qualidade de imagem seja exibida N vel de Preto em HDMI Normal Baixo Voc pode selecionar o n vel de preto para ajustar a profundidade da tela Esta fun o somente est ativa quando um dispositivo externo estiver conectado TV via HDMI A fun o N vel de Preto HDMI pode n o ser compat vel com todos os dispositivos externos Modo Filme Desligado Auto1 Auto2 ATV pode ser configurada para detectar e processar automaticamente sinais de video de todas as fontes e ajustar a imagem para obter a melhor qualidade Modo Filme suportado em TV V deo Componente 480i 1080i e HDMI 480 1080 e Desligado Desliga a fun
176. essione o bot o CC no controle remoto para ligar ou desligar a fun o Closed Caption O recurso Closed Caption n o funciona nos modos Componente PC ou HDMI Modo de Legenda poss vel selecionar o Modo de Legenda desejado A disponibilidade das legendas depende do programa que est sendo transmitido e CC1 CC4 Texti Text4 apenas canais anal gicos A fun o de legendas anal gicas funciona tanto no modo de canal de TV anal gico quanto quando um sinal fornecido de um dispositivo externo TV Dependendo do sinal da transmiss o a fun o Legenda anal gica pode funcionar em canais digitais Portugu s 27 Q Bloqueio de Canais Desligado Ligado Este recurso permite que voc impe a usu rios n o autorizados como crian as de assistirem programas inadequados ao ativar o mute do v deo e do udio Antes de a tela de configura o aparecer a tela de entrada do n mero PIN aparecer Digite sua senha de 4 d gitos A senha padr o de uma TV nova 0 0 0 0 Voc poder alterar a senha selecionando Mudar Senha no menu Voc pode bloquear alguns canais na Lista de Canais consulte a p gina 18 Bloqueio de Canais est dispon vel somente no modo TV Q Mudar a Senha Voc poder alterar sua senha pessoal necess rio para configurar a TV Antes de a tela de configura o aparecer a tela de entrada do n mero PIN aparecer Digite sua senha atual de 4 d gitos A senha padr o de uma TV nova 0 0
177. eu PC funcionar como um servidor da TV e M todo 1 Selecione uma pasta em My Computer selecione o menu Share e em seguida selecione o submenu Share Folder e M todo 2 Selecione uma pasta emMy Computer clique com o bot o direito sobre a pasta selecionada e ent o selecione Share Folder no menu pop up e M todo 3 Coloque o ponteiro do mouse sobre uma pasta na lista de pastas em My Computer no painel da esquerda e arraste e solte a pasta para o painel Pastas compartilhadas Se for exibida uma mensagem pedindo para voc confirmar a pasta compartilhada selecione Sim lt M todo 1 gt lt M todo 2 gt lt M todo 3 gt HE SAMSUNG PC Share Mansoor ua We SAMSUNG PC Share Mansgst uia AB Enab shara opton forthe coca tam Es Cancelamento de uma Shared Folder poss vel cancelar o compartilhamento de uma pasta no PC Selecione uma pasta no painel Shared Folder e selecione Unshare Folder e M todo 1 Selecione uma pasta no painel Shared Folder selecione o menu Compartilhar e em seguida selecioneUnshare Folder e M todo 2 Selecione uma pasta no painel Shared Folder clique com o bot o direito na pasta selecionada e em seguida selecioneUnshare Folder no menu pop up e M todo 3 Coloque o ponteiro do mouse sobre uma pasta no painel Shared Folder e arraste e solte no painel My Computer Se for exibida uma mensagem pedindo para voc confirmar o cancelamento selecione Sim lt M todo 1 gt
178. exibido na parte superior da tela com o tempo de ES PRACA EAD FNGLA Sl FRNA ES RETO reprodu o Para ajustar o volume da m sica pressione o bot o de volume no controle remoto Para remover o som pressione o bot o MUTE no controle remoto Se o som estiver estranho ao reproduzir arquivos mp3 ajuste o Equalizador e SRS TruSurround HD no menu de som Um arquivo mp3 com excesso de modula o pode causar problemas de som A dura o da reprodu o de um arquivo de m sica pode ser exibida como 00 00 00 se a informa o do tempo de reprodu o n o for localizada no in cio do arquivo lt lt REW ou gt gt FF n o funcionam durante a reprodu o Se e BD D 8 DB Bot es de controle de reprodu o de m sica Bot o Opera es ENTERCS Reproduz Pausa o arquivo de m sica gt Reproduzir o arquivo de musica 1 Pausar o arquivo de m sica E Sair do modo de reprodu o e voltar lista de m sicas TOOLS Executar v rias fun es dos menus de m sica cone de informa o de fun o de M sica Quando todos os arquivos de m sica na pasta ou o arquivo selecionado s o repetidos O Modo repeti o est Ligado Q Quando todos os arquivos de m sica na pasta ou o arquivo selecionado s o reproduzidos uma vez O Modo repeti o est Desligado Reprodu o do grupo de m sica 1 Pressione o bot o A p
179. ficador de v deo Codec de udio Divx 3 11 Divx 4 x Divx 5 1 Divx 6 0 XviD MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM AVI H 264 BP MULAW ALAW H 264 MP H 264 HP MPEG 4 SP MPEG 4 ASP Motion JPEG Divx 3 11 Divx 4 x Divx 5 1 Divx 6 0 acy ae MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM H264 MP MULAW ALAW AAC H 264 HP MPEG 4 SP MPEG 4 ASP Motion JPEG Divx 3 11 Divx 4 x Divx 5 1 Divx 6 0 XviD ASF H 264 BP H 264 MP H 264 HP MPEG 4 SP MPEG 4 ASP Window Media Video v9 H 264 BP H 264 MP H 264 HP mp4 MP4 SMP4 MPEG 4 SP ADPCM HE AAC mp3 MPEG 4 ASP XVID H 264 BP H 264 MP H 264 HP ADPCM HE AAC MPEG 4 SP MPEG 4 ASP MPEG2 vro ps VRO VOB MPEG1 AC3 MPEG LPCM m MPEG 1 Fluxo de programa mpeg ps MPEG2 Fluxo de programa ACS MPEG EEO MPEG2 Fluxo de transporte outros ts H 264 Fluxo de transporte VC1 Fluxo de transporte Extens o do arquivo Container avi mkv WMA MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM MULAW ALAW AAC asf wmv VC1 3GPP 3gp AAC HE AAC MP3 DD Portugu s 52 Bot es de controle de reprodu o de video Bot o Opera es ENTERCS Reproduz Pausa o arquivo de filme gt Reproduzir o arquivo de filme N Pausa o arquivo de filme TOOLS Executar v rias fun es dos menus de filme E Sair do modo de r
180. fications to it Object code means any non source form of a work A Standard Interface means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body or in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language one that is widely used among developers working in that language The System Libraries of an executable work include anything other than the work as a whole that a is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component but which is not part of that Major Component and b serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form A Major Component in this context means a major essential component kernel window system and so on of the specific operating system if any on which the executable work runs or a compiler used to produce the work or an object code interpreter used to run it The Corresponding Source for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate install and for an executable work run the object code and to modify the work including scripts to control those activities However it does not include the work s System Libraries or general purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work For example
181. fixos automaticamente n o sendo poss vel alter los Selecionar todos Retirar sele o de todos e Selecionar Tudo poss vel selecionar todos os canais na lista de canais e Desmarcar Tudo poss vel retirar a sele o de todos os canais selecionados poss vel selecionar Desmarcar Tudo apenas quando j h um canal selecionado Prog Autom tica Para procedimentos detalhados sobre como usar Prog Autom tica consulte a p gina 15 Menu de op es de Lista de Canais em Programado poss vel visualizar modificar ou excluir uma reserva Pressione o bot o TOOLS para usar o menu de op es Alterar informa es Selecione para alterar uma reserva de visualiza o 348pm 021 CULTI Cancelar programa o Cancelar programa o Selecione para cancelar uma reserva de visualiza o Informa es Selecionar todos Informa es Selecione para visualizar uma reserva de visualiza o Tamb m poss vel alterar as informa es de reserva Selecionar todos Selecionar todos os programas reservados Portugu s 18 E Menu de Imagem Q Modo Voc pode selecionar o tipo de imagem que melhor corresponde aos seus requisitos de visualiza o AJ Pressione o bot o TOOLS para exibir o menu Ferramentas Tamb m poss vel definir o modo de imagem selecionando Imagem Modo de Imagem Din mico Seleciona a imagem para maior defini o em uma sala clara Padr o Seleciona a imagem pa
182. ft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 If you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence Q Licen a SRS 0 TruSurround HD SRS e ce Symbol s o marcas registradas da SRS Labs Inc TruSurround HD incorporada sob licen
183. function the movie can be played later from the point where it was stopped 1 2 3 Select the movie file you want to play continuously by pressing lt 4 or gt button to select it from the Movie List Press the gt Play ENTER Ls button Select Continuous Movie Play Help Resume Play by pressing the Blue button The Movie will begin to play from where it was stopped If Continuous Movie Play Help function is set On in the Setup menu a pop up message will appear when you resume play a movie file English 54 E Movie Play Option Menu Movie Play Option Menu O Picture Setting Sound Setting You can configure the picture and sound settings O Picture Size Move CHEnter i Exit Fit Play video at the TV screen size Original Play video at the original size QO Caption Setting You can set the captions for the movie Caption gt On Off You can turn the captions for the movie on or off Caption Size Small Standard Large You can change the font size of the captions Caption Sync You can adjust the caption sync Caption Sync Reset You can reset the adjusted caption sync Q Information The movie file information is displayed Q Safe Remove You can remove the device safely from the TV English 55 fl Using the Setup Menu Setup displays the user settings of the Media Play menu 1 Press the MEDIA P button 2 Press the lt or gt button to select Setup then
184. fuso hor rio de sua rea Pressione o bot o ENTER L s Se voc tiver recebido um sinal digital a hora ser ajustada automaticamente Se n o consulte as instru es Ajuste de hor rio para ajustar o rel gio consulte a p gina 29 30 A descri o do m todo de conex o que fornece a melhor qualidade de imagem HD ser exibida Verifique a descri o e pressione o bot o ENTER Ls Pressione o bot o lt ou gt para selecionar Cons Guia Produto ou Ver TV Pressione o bot o ENTER L lt e Cons Guia Produto Voc ser levado a Guia do Produto no qual poss vel visualizar introdu es para diversas fun es de sua nova HDTV e Ver TV Voc pode assistir os canais memorizados Se voc quiser restaurar esse recurso 1 BEDS Pressione o bot o MENU para exibir o menu Pressione o bot o A ou Y para selecionar Configura o e em seguida pressione ENTER Ls Pressione o bot o ENTER Ls novamente para selecionar Plug amp Play O recurso Plug amp Play est dispon vel somente no modo TV Se um canal for bloqueado utilizando a fun o Bloqueio de Canais a janela de digita o da senha ser exibida consulte a p gina 28 o Plug amp Play Idioma Portugu s Tempo o o Es e 5 S D S Closed Caption Configura o da Rede Portugu s 14 CANAL E Menu de Canais Q Antena gt Ar Cabo Antes de a TV iniciar a memoriza o dos canais dispon veis voc dever espec
185. gia Ao assistir TV noite defina a op o de modo Economia de Energia para Alta para reduzir o cansa o visual e tamb m economizar energia AJ Pressione o bot o TOOLS para exibir o menu Ferramentas Voc tamb m pode configurar o modo Economia de Energia selecionando Ferramentas Economia de Energia W Sistema de Cor AV gt Auto PAL M PAL N NTSC Normalmente a TV pode receber imagem e som de boa qualidade quando est no modo Auto Este modo detecta automaticamente o sistema de cores do sinal Em caso do de recep o de sinal com cores insatisfat rias selecione o modo Sistema de Cor AV como PAL M PAL N ou NTSC Q PIP Para procedimentos detalhados sobre as op es de configura o consulte a p gina 23 Portugu s 28 E Ajustando o Tempo Q Rel gio Plug amp Play Idioma Portugu s necess rio configurar o rel gio para se poder usar os diversos recursos de Temporizador da TV A hora aparecer sempre que voc pressionar o bot o INFO Se o cabo de for a for desconectado ser necess rio definir novamente no rel gio Tempo Closed Caption Configura o da Rede Bloqueio de Canais Ligado Modo Rel gio Mudar Senha E poss vel ajustar a hora atual de modo manual ou autom tico Za pe pls Tempo e Auto Defina a hora atual de modo autom tico usando o hor rio recebido da transmiss o digital Sleep Timer Desligado Manual Defina a hora atual com um hor rio especificado manualmen
186. grammed You can view modify or delete a reservation Press the TOOLS button to use the option menu Change Info Select to change a viewing reservation Cancel Schedules Select to cancel a viewing reservation 7 3 e 5 3 3 2 3 48pm 02 1 Information Select to view a viewing reservation You can also change the reservation information Select All Select all reserved program English 18 PICTURE E Picture Menu Q Mode You can select the type of picture which best corresponds to your viewing requirements AJ Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu You can also set the picture mode by Ei Mode Standard selecting Tools Picture Mode 5 EEE Contrast Dynamic Brightness ae Sharpness Selects the picture for increased definition in a bright room Color Tint G R G50 R50 Standard Advanced Settings Selects the picture for the optimum display in a normal environment Natural Selects the picture for an optimum and eye comfortable display This function is not available in PC mode Movie Selects the picture for viewing movies in a dark room Q Backlight Contrast Brightness Sharpness Color Tint G R a Your television has several setting options that allow you to control the picture quality oe re Backlight Adjusts the brightness of LCD back light Aira ADS EEE OE Contrast Adjusts the contrast level of the picture Brightness Adjusts the brightness level of the pic
187. h the object code If the place to copy the object code is a network server the Corresponding Source may be on a different server operated by you or a third party that supports equivalent copying facilities provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements e Convey the object code using peer to peer transmission provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d A separable portion of the object code whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library need not be included in conveying the object code work A User Product is either 1 a consumer product which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal family or household purposes or 2 anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling In determining whether a product is a consumer product doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage For a particular product received by a particular user normally used refers to a typical or common use of that class of product regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses or
188. he MEDIA P button on the remote control DLNA does not support the following functions 2 1 2 SRR The Background Music and Background Music Setting functions Sorting files by preference in the Photo Music and Movie folders The Change Group Info function The Copy Delete function The Safe Remove function The REW FF lt lt gt key functions while a movie is playing Playing Movie Continuously Resume Play function The Skip function may not work with some container such as asf and mkv The Divx DRM Multi audio embedded caption does not supported Samsung PC Share manager should be permitted by the firewall program on your PC The Skip lt gt keys or Pause function may not work while a movie is playing for the DLNA of other manufacturers depending on the corresponding content information S The playing time may not be displayed while a movie is playing English 61 ANYNET il Connecting Anynet Devices What is Anynet Anynet is a function that enables you to control all connected Samsung devices that support Anynet with your Samsung TV s remote The Anynett system can be used only with Samsung devices that have the Anynet feature To be sure your Samsung device has this feature check if there is an Anynet logo on it To connect toa TV TV prreeeeerenenenenereranaeeeneraseneaecenanasenesnoay Anynet Device 1 Anynet Device 2 Anynet
189. he Red Green Blue Cyan Magenta Yellow Color Bar Patterns without using an additional Blue Filter Blue Only Mode is available when the picture mode is set to Movie or Standard Picture Reset Reset Picture Mode Cancel Resets all picture settings to the default values Reset Picture Mode Current picture values return to default settings English 22 E Viewing Picture in Picture You can use the PIP feature to simultaneously watch the TV tuner and one external video Energy Saving source This product has one built in tuner which does not allow PIP to function in the same mode Please see PIP Settings below for details PIP A Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu You can also configure PIP related settings by selecting Tools PIP Ifyou select the PIP picture sound refer to the Sound Menu instructions refer to pages 25 26 PIP Settings Main picture Sub picture Component 2 HDMI1 HDMI2 HDMI3 DVI HDMI4 TV PC S While Internet TV is in operation the PIP function cannot be used If you turn the TV off while watching in PIP mode and turn it on again the PIP window will disappear You may notice that the picture in the PIP window becomes slightly unnatural when you use the main screen to view a game or karaoke O PIP On Off You can activate or deactivate the PIP function PIP Size O Size gt ml 0 0 mm Position Air Cable Y
190. hedules set on the mobile Home Network Center phone 111 1234 5671 Access Allowed Media 111 1234 5672 Access Allows the mobile phone O Setup 111 1234 5673 Denied m 111 1234 5674 Denied Denied Blocks the mobile phone Return f Exit Delete Deletes the mobile phone from the list This function just deletes the name from the list If the deleted mobile device turns on or tries to connect to the TV it may be shown on the list W Media Shows a list of mobile phones which is available to control media contents videos photos music from the phone Besides mobile phone other mobile devices that support DLNA DMC are available Message RE Allowed Media Allows the mobile phone amp Setup TV name Home Network Center Denied Blocks the mobile phone Return p Exit Delete Deletes the mobile phone from the list This function just deletes the corresponding name on the list If the deleted mobile device turns on or tries to connect to the TV it may be shown on the list Q Setup Message On Off You can determine whether to use the message function the call arrivals text message EMATE contents and schedules set on the mobile phone Media On Off EM Message Message You can select whether to use the Media function that plays the contents videos Bri Media Media photos music from the mobile phone TV name TV name You can set the TV name so as to find it easily
191. hese ways a Convey the object code in or embodied in a physical product including a physical distribution medium accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange b Convey the object code in or embodied in a physical product including a physical distribution medium accompanied by a written offer valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model to give anyone who possesses the object code either 1 a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source or 2 access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge c Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially and only if you received the object code with such an offer in accord with subsection 6b d Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place gratis or for a charge and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along wit
192. hose thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf under your direction and control on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below Sublicensing is not allowed section 10 makes it unnecessary Protecting Users Legal Rights From Anti Circumvention Law No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996 or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures When you convey a covered work you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing against the work s users your or third parties legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures Conveying Verbatim Copies You may convey verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non permis
193. htness and contrast when displaying still images 2009 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd All rights reserved Contents MEDIA PLAY DLNA Mist Of Features ossos ne a ea aaa 2 E Setting the DLNA Network m Accessories ii m Installing the DLNA Applicati m Viewing the Control Panel m Viewing the Connection Panel m Remote Control FSN 2 sad m Using the DLNA Application 4 m Using the DLNA Menu 5 E Installing Batteries in the Remote Control ANYNET CONNECTIONS m Connecting Anynet Device m Setting Up Anynet m Connecting VHF and UHF Antennas wo m Switching between Anynet Devices m Connecting Cable TV T MIR OCOMIG casarem E cence m Connecting a DVD Blu ray player Cable Box Satellite receiver Set m Listening through a Receiver Home theater teca 8 m Troubleshooting for Anynet m Connecting a DVD Blu ray player Cable Box Satellite receiver Set TOP BOX viailDM reece ne a A 8 CONTENT LIBRARY m Connecting a DVD Blu ray player Cable Box Satellite receiver Set Top Box 5 via Component cables 9 m Using the Content Library m Connecting a Camcorder wd m Using the TV Memory Content m Connecting a VCR 10 m Using the Content Management m Connecting a Digital Audio System O m Connecting an Amplifier DVD Home Theater add INTERNET TV m Connecting a PC m Getting Started with Internet TV
194. icker weather forecast By pressing the red button the options screen enables you to configure Ticker e Service Selects the type of Ticker Weather or News service If you are in Weather you can also select Favourite Cities Position Sets the Ticker at the top or bottom of the screen Transparency Controls how transparent the Ticker is in relation to the background image Servi o 4 Tempo gt Mover 4 gt Ajustar 5 Retornar The Ticker and Weather Forecast widgets share the list of Favourite Cities English 73 HOME NETWORK CENTER il Home Network Center About the Home Network Center The Home Network Center connects the TV and mobile phones through a network You can view call arrivals text message contents and schedules set on the mobile phone on the TV using the Home Network Center In addition you can play the media contents saved on the mobile phones such as videos photos and music by controlling them onto the TV via the network If the device supports DLNA DMC Digital Media Controller function Home Network Center function is available The Samsung SCH i910 mobile phone supports the Home Network Center Other models will be added in the future The mobile device may need additional software installation For details refer to each user s guide Connecting to the Home Network Center For more information about the network settings refer to pages 33 35 e Connecting to a Wi Fi Ad hoc network 1 Con
195. if any on which the executable work runs or a compiler used to produce the work or an object code interpreter used to run it The Corresponding Source for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate install and for an executable work run the object code and to modify the work including scripts to control those activities However it does not include the work s System Libraries or general purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work For example Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work Basic Permissions All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if th
196. ificar o tipo de fonte de sinal conectada TV isto Ar ou sistema de Cabo AJ Pressione o bot o TOOLS para exibir o menu Ferramentas Tamb m poss vel definir a antena selecionando Canal Chavear para cabo ou Chavear para ar Se a antena estiver conectada a ANT 1 IN AIR selecione Ar e se estiver conectada a ANT 2 IN CABLE selecione Cabo Se tanto a ANT 1 IN AIR quanto a ANT 2 IN CABLE estiverem conectadas selecione a entrada de antena desejada Se a entrada de antena n o for selecionada adequadamente podem aparecer interfer ncias na tela Guia Completo Q Prog Autom tica Ar Sinal de antena a reo Cabo Sinal da antena a cabo Ar Cabo Sinais de antena a reo e a cabo Se a antena estiver conectada a ANT 1 IN AIR selecione Ar e se estiver conectada a ANT 2 IN CABLE selecione Cabo Se tanto a ANT 1 IN AIR quanto a ANT 2 IN CABLE estiverem conectadas selecione Ar Cabo Se voc quiser interromper a programa o autom tica pressione ENTER L lt A mensagem Parar Programa o Autom tica ser exibida Selecione Sim pressionando o bot o A ou Y e ent o pressione ENTER Cd Q Guia Completo Mini Guia As informa es do Guia de programa o eletr nica EPG Electronic Programme Guide s o fornecidas pelas redes respons veis pela transmiss o Indica es de programas podem aparecer em branco ou estar desatualizadas devido s informa es transmitidas em um dete
197. ified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made If you convey an object code work under this section in or with or specifically for use in a User Product and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term regardless of how the transaction is characterized the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product for example the work has been installed in ROM The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service warranty or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network Corresponding Source conveyed and Installation Information provided in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented and with an implementation available to the public in source code form and must require no special password
198. igura o do modo xvYCC como ligado aumenta o espa o de cores e detalhes ao assistir filmes de um dispositivo externo ou seja DVD player conectado aos conectores HDMI ou Component IN xvYCC est dispon vel quando o modo de imagem est configurado para Filme e a entrada externa est configurada para modo HDMI ou Component Portugu s 20 Q Op es de imagem No modo PC voc pode fazer ajustes somente em Tonalidade de Cor e Tamanho dentre pesa agem os itens em Op es de imagem o Normal 16 9 Tonalidade de cor Fria Normal Quente1 Quente2 Quente3 Auto Quente1 Quente2 ou Quente3 s o ativados apenas quando o modo de imagem for As defini es podem ser ajustadas separadamente para cada entrada da TV Tamanho Modo Filme Desligado Filme Auto Motion Plus 120Hz Padr o Modo Somente Desligado Mover Entrar O Retornar poss vel que voc queira alterar o tamanho da imagem na tela A sua TV vem com v rias op es de tamanho de tela projetadas para o melhor desempenho com tipos espec ficos de entrada de video Seu receptor de cabo sat lite tamb m pode ter a pr pria configura o de tamanhos de tela Geralmente voc deve visualizar a TV no modo 16 9 o m ximo poss vel Voc tamb m pode pressionar o bot o P SIZE no controle remoto para alterar o tamanho da imagem 16 9 Ajusta a imagem para o modo amplo 16 9 Zoom1 Amplia o tamanho da imagem na tela Zoom2 Amplia o tamanho da t
199. imum 1920 X 1080 pixels e If a vertical frequency option exists on your display settings dialog box the correct value is 60 or 60 Hz Otherwise just click OK and exit the dialog box English 23 Display Modes If the signal from the system equals the standard signal mode the screen is adjusted automatically If the signal from the system doesn t equal the standard signal mode adjust the mode by referring to your videocard user guide otherwise there may be no video For the display modes listed below the screen image has been optimized during manufacturing D Sub and HDMI DVI Input When using an HDMI DVI cable connection you must use the HDMI IN3 DVI IN jack E Horizontal Frequency Vertical Frequency Pixel Clock Frequency Sync Polarity Mode Resolution KHz Hz MHz H V IBM 640 x 350 31 469 70 086 25 175 720 x 400 31 469 70 087 28 322 l 640 x 480 35 000 66 667 30 240 l MAC 832 x 624 49 726 74 551 57 284 l 1152 x 870 68 681 75 062 100 000 l 720 x 576 35 910 59 950 32 750 1152 x 864 53 783 59 959 81 750 VESA CVT 1280 x 720 44 772 59 855 74 500 1280 x 720 56 456 74 777 95 750 1280 x 960 75 231 74 857 130 000 l 640 x 480 31 469 59 940 25 175 l 640 x 480 37 861 72 809 31 500 l 640 x 480 37 500 75 000 31 500 l 800 x 600 37 879 60 317 40 000 800 x 600 48 077 72 188 50 000 800 x 600 46 875 75 000 49 500 1024 x 768 48
200. inal B IN no interruptor RF A B Conecte outro cabo entre o terminal OUT no divisor e o terminal A IN no interruptor RF A B Conecte o ltimo cabo de antena entre o terminal OUT no interruptor RF A B e o terminal ANT 2 IN CABLE na parte traseira da TV Depois de ter feito essa conex o ajuste o interruptor A B na posi o A para a visualiza o normal Coloque o interruptor AIB na posi o B para visualizar os canais codificados Ao ajustar o interruptor A B em B voc precisar sintonizar a TV com o canal de sa da do decodificador que normalmente o canal 3 ou 4 D moe 69 Portugu s 7 E Conex o de um DVD Blu ray player Decodificador Receptor de sat lite Set Top Box por meio de HDMI Esta conex o pode ser efetuada apenas se houver uma sa da HDMI no dispositivo externo DVD Blu ray player Decodificador Painel lateral da TV Painel traseiro da TV Receptor de sat lite Set Top HOMIIN DVIIN Ti ou O Cabo HDMI n o fornecido 1 Conecte um cabo HDMI entre a entrada HDMI IN 1 2 3 DVI IN 4 da TV e a entrada HDMI do DVD player ou Decodificador Receptor de sat lite Set Top Box O que HDMI HDMI interface multim dia de alta defini o uma interface que permite a transmiss o digital de sinais de v deo e de udio com apenas um cabo Adiferen a entre HDMI e DVI que o dispositivo HDMI
201. inel de conex o m Controle remoto m Coloca o das pilhas no controle remoto CONEX ES m Ligar antenas VHF e UHF m Ligar a um sistema de televis m Conex o de um DVD Blu ray player Decodificador Receptor de sat lite Set Top Box por meio de HDMI cesses 8 m Conex o de um DVD Blu ray player Decodificador Receptor de sat lite Set Top Box por meio de DVI 8 m Conex o de um DVD Blu ray player Decodificador Receptor de sat lite Set Top Box por meio de cabos Componente E m Conectando uma filmadora m Ligar um v deo cassete m Conex o de um sistema udio digital m Como conectar um amplificador DVD Home Theater 3 m Conectar um computador 12 m Visualiza o dos menus m Recurso Plug amp Play CANAL m Menu de Canais m Gerenciamento de Canais m Menu de Imagem m Visualiza o do PI m Display do computador m Configura o da TV com o seu PC m Menu de Som m Conectando os fones de ouvido Vendido separadamente CONFIGURA O m Menu de Configura o m Ajustando o Tempo m Conex o de Rede m Configurando a Rede ENTRADA SUPORTE m Menu de Entrada m Menu de suporte MEDIA PLAY USB E DLNA m Conex o a um dispositivo USB m Fun o Media Play m Classifica o da lista de fotos m Menu de op o de lista de fotos m Visualiza o de uma foto ou apresenta o d
202. informa es Q Remover com seguran a Voc pode remover o dispositivo com seguran a da TV 57 ga coen CsE AD E E Visualiza o de uma foto ou apresenta o de slides Visualiza o de uma apresenta o de slides 1 Pressione o bot o Y para selecionar a se o de lista de arquivos 2 Pressione o bot o TOOLS 3 Pressione o bot o A ou Y para selecionar Slide Show e em seguida pressione o bot o ENTER L lt x Copiar 5 F x a sis y Reproduzir o grupo atual Todos os arquivos na lista de fotos s o utilizados na apresenta o de slides Copiar grupo atual Informa es Remover com seguran a S Durante a apresenta o os arquivos s o exibidos na ordem a partir do arquivo exibido no momento A apresenta o de slides avan a na ordem classificada na lista de fotos Arquivos de m sica podem ser reproduzidos automaticamente durante a apresenta o de slides se M sica de Fundo estiver definida como Ligado gt Normal 1234 jpg 580x765 01 02 2009 5 15 Cs Pausa lt 4 Ant Prox A Ferramentas D Retornar Enquanto uma lista de fotos est sendo exibida pressione o bot o Reproduzir ENTER Lino controle remoto para iniciar o slide show Bot es de controle de apresenta o de slides v Bot o Opera es ENTERLCS Reproduz Pausa a apresenta o de slides gt Reproduzir a apresenta o de slides 1 Pausar a aprese
203. ing a TV program Audio Device When Receiver is activated VOL MUTE button The Anynet function only works when the active source on the TV remote control is set to TV 2 The 6 button works only while in the recordable state You cannot control Anynet devices using the buttons on the TV You can control Anynet devices only using the TV remote control The TV remote control may not work under certain conditions If this occurs reselect the Anynett device The Anynet functions do not operate with other manufacturers products 7 The lt lt gt gt operations may differ depending on the device E Recording Press the TOOLS button Press the ENTER Ls button to select Anynet HDMI CEC Press the A or Y button to select Recording Immediately and press the ENTER Ls button Recording begins When there is more than one recording device Cones When multiple recording devices are connected the recording devices are listed Sait Press the A or Y button to select a recording device and press the ENTER Ls button Recording begins When the recording device is not displayed select Device List and press the Red button to search devices Press the EXIT button to exit You can record the source streams by selecting Recording device name Pressing the Le button will record whatever you are currently watching If you are watching video from another device the video from the device is recorded Before recording ch
204. interrupt viewing temporarily during a meal for example 1 Press the POWER button on the remote control The screen is turned off and a red standby indicator appears on your set 2 To switch your set back on simply press the POWER 5 button again Do not leave your set in standby mode for long periods of time when you are away on holiday for example It is best to unplug the set from the mains and aerial E Plug amp Play Feature When the TV is initially powered on basic settings proceed automatically and subsequently 1 Press the POWER button on the remote control You can also use the POWER 5 button on the TV POWER v The message Selecione o idioma do menu is displayed Ca O 2 Press the ENTER C button Press the A or Y button to select the language then press CJ CGJ GJ the ENTER LS button The message Select Home Use when installing this TV in your home is displayed Plug amp Play 3 Press the lt or gt button to select Store Demo or Home Use then press the ENTERL Selecione o idioma do menu button The message Select the Antenna source to memorize is displayed 7 We recommend setting the TV to Home Use mode for the best picture in your home environment 7 Store Demo mode is only intended for use in retail environments If the unit is accidentally set to Store Demo mode and you want to return to Home Use Standard Press the volume button on the TV When the volume OSD is dis
205. irmware ap s a conclus o das atualiza es a nova vers o ter um n mero maior do que a vers o antiga Por ocasi o da atualiza o do software as configura es de v deo e udio feitas por voc voltam aos ajustes padr o de f brica Recomendamos que voc anote as suas configura es para que possa reconfigur las facilmente ap s atualizar o software Mover C Entrar O Retornar Software Alternativo Backup Caso haja um problema com o novo firmware e ele afete a opera o poss vel retornar o software para a vers o anterior Caso o software tenha sido alterado o software existente ser exibido poss vel trocar o software atual pelo software alternativo utilizando Software Alternativo Portugu s 38 1 Guia de Conex o HD Este menu apresenta o m todo de conex o que fornece a qualidade m xima para a HD TV Consulte essas informa es ao conectar dispositivos externos TV Q Entre em contato com a Samsung Veja essas informa es quando sua TV n o funcionar corretamente ou caso deseje atualizar o software poss vel consultar informa es sobre o centro de atendimento produtos e m todos de download de softwares Portugu s 39 MEDIA PLAY USB E DLNA E Conex o a um dispositivo USB 1 Pressione o bot o POWER para ligar a TV Painel lateral da TV 2 Conecte um dispositivo USB contendo arquivos de fotos m sicas e ou filmes ao conector USB1 HDD ou USB2 na lateral da TV 3 Q
206. is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program to make sure it remains free software for all its users We the Free Software Foundation use the GNU General Public License for most of our software it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for them if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights Therefore you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it responsibilities to respect the freedom of others For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps 1 assert copyright on the software and 2 offer you this License giving you legal permission
207. iser retornar ao modo Casa Padr o Pressione o bot o de volume da TV Quando o Menu do volume for exibido mantenha pressionado o bot o MENU na TV durante 5 segundos Pressione o bot o A ou Y para memorizar os canais da conex o selecionada Pressione o bot o ENTER Ls para selecionar Iniciar Ar Sinal de antena a reo Cabo Sinal da antena a cabo Ar Cabo Sinais de antena a reo e a cabo Se a antena estiver conectada a ANT 1 IN AIR selecione Ar e se estiver conectada a ANT 2 IN CABLE selecione Cabo Se tanto a ANT 1 IN AIR quanto a ANT 2 IN CABLE estiverem conectadas selecione Ar Cabo Pressione o bot o ENTER Ls para selecionar Iniciar A TV come a a memorizar todos os canais dispon veis Z Para parar a busca antes de seu final pressione o bot o ENTER Ls com Parar selecionado Depois que todos os canais dispon veis forem armazenados os canais com sinal fraco come ar o a ser removidos O menu de programa o autom tica ser ent o exibido novamente Pressione o bot o ENTER L quando a memoriza o de canal estiver conclu da A mensagem Ajustar o Modo Rel gio ser exibida Pressione o bot o ENTER L s Pressione o bot o A ou Y para selecionar Auto e em seguida pressione ENTER Ls A mensagem Selecionar o fuso hor rio de onde voc mora ser exibida Se voc selecionar Manual Ajustar data e hora atuais ser exibida C Entrar Pressione o bot o A ou Y para destacar o
208. ision will eventually turn off if no controls are operated for 3 hours after the TV was turned on by the timer This function is only available in timer on mode and prevents overheating which may occur if a TV is on for too long time English 30 E Network Connection You can set up the Internet Protocol so that you can communicate with various connected networks Q Network Connection Cable LAN Connection for a DHCP Environment The procedures to set up the network using Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP are described below Since an IP address subnet mask gateway and DNS are automatically allocated when DHCP is selected you do not have to enter them manually 1 Connect the LAN port on the rear panel of the TV and the external modem with a LAN Cable 2 Connect the Modem port on the wall and the external modem with a Modem Cable The Modem Port on the Wall External Modem TV Rear Panel ADSL VDSL Cable TV eee DE O Modem Cable LAN Cable ae You can connect the LAN via a Sharer Router The Modem Port on the Wall External Modem TV Rear Panel ADSL VDSL Cable TV IP Sharer E enem os BM Ree Modem Cable LAN Cable LAN Cable You can connect the LAN port and the TV directly depending on your network status The LAN Port on the Wall TV Rear Panel LAN Cable The te
209. item da Biblioteca de conte do e Selecione um item de conte do e pressione o bot o ENTERCS poss vel reproduzir ou excluir o item de conte do selecionado USB poss vel verificar o conte do salvo no dispositivo USB para cada subitem de Content Library e Selecione um item de conte do e pressione o bot o ENTERCS poss vel reproduzir o item de conte do selecionado ou copi lo para a mem ria da TV Content Library suporta apenas os dispositivos de classe de armazenamento em massa USB MSC MSC um dispositivo de armazenamento em massa Mass Storage Class Bulk Only Transport Exemplos de MSC s o os pendrives e leitores de cart o Flash 4 Ao jogar um jogo utilizando um dispositivo de mem ria externa USB ser poss vel salvar o seu jogo dependendo do jogo Tenha cuidado ao remover o dispositivo de mem ria USB ao salvar dados no dispositivo pois isso pode fazer com que os dados sejam perdidos Download de novos conte dos Conte dos diferentes dos inclu dos ser o fornecidos no site da Web Samsung com com ou sem taxas adicionais Verifique o n mero de UDN antes de fazer o download de um novo item de conte do necess rio digitar o n mero de UDN no site Samsung com para fazer o download de um item de conte do Portugu s 66 e Download de conte do em pa oO N N 6 Visite o site www samsung com e abra a pagina Content Library Insira o n mero do produto UDN Unique Device Number
210. ividade da rede abre Entrar O Retornat Configura o de Rede a cabo Configura o manual Para conectar a TV rede usando um endere o IP est tico voc deve configurar o IP Configura o de Rede a cabo 1 Defina Tipo de Rede como Cabo Configura o de Rede Config Manual Teste de Rede Selecione Configura o de Rede a Cabo 2 Endere o IP 3 Defina Configura o de Rede como Config Manual M scara de Sub rede Gateway 4 Servidor DNS La Eq Ea m Configure Endere o IP M scara de sub rede Gateway e Servidor DNS Pressione os bot es num ricos no controle remoto ao configurar a rede manualmente Mover C2 Entrar 5 Retornar 5 Selecione Network Test para verificar a conectividade da rede Portugu s 34 Configura o de Rede sem fio O menu ativado apenas se o Adaptador de rede sem fio Samsung estiver conectado e Configura o de protocolo de Internet Config Autom tica Config Manual e Teste de Rede poss vel testar ou confirmar o status de conex o da rede ap s configur la 7 Quando n o for poss vel conectar a um AP distribuidor de IP sem fio Sua TV pode n o localizar um AP Access Point configurado como um tipo de SSID privado Nesse caso altere as configura es de AP e tente novamente Se o seu provedor de internet possuir registrado o endere o MAC do dispositivo usado para conex o com a Internet pela primeira vez e autenticar o endere o MAC toda vez que v
211. ivo Anynet est ligada Quero iniciar o Anynet Verifique se o dispositivo Anynet est corretamente conectado TV e verifique se Anynett HDMI CEC est definido como Ligado no menu de configura o do Anynet e Pressione o bot o TV no controle remoto da TV para mudar para TV Em seguida pressione o bot o TOOLS para exibir o menu do Anynet e selecione o menu desejado Quero sair do Anynet e Selecione Ver TV no menu do Anynet e Pressione o bot o SOURCEno controle remoto da TV e selecione um dispositivo que n o seja Anynet e Pressione V CH A PRE CH e FAV CH para alterar o modo TV Note que o bot o de canal somente funciona quando um dispositivo Anynet com sintonizador interno n o estiver conectado A mensagem Conectando e N o poss vel usar o controle remoto quando se est configurando o Anynet ou ao dispositivo Anynett mudando para um modo de visualiza o aparece na tela e Use o controle remoto quando a configura o do Anynet ou a mudan a para modo de visualiza o tiver sido conclu da O dispositivo Anynet n o e N o se pode usar a fun o reproduzir quando o Plug amp Play estiver em andamento toca O dispositivo conectado n o Verifique se o dispositivo suporta ou n o as fun es do Anynett exibido Verifique se o cabo HDMI 1 3 est conectado corretamente e Verifique se Anynet HDMI CEC est definido como Ligado no menu de configura o do Anynet Procure novamente di
212. ivo externo Mover Entrar 9 Retornar Teste de Som Se achar que h um problema com o som realize o teste de som poss vel verificar o som reproduzindo uma melodia integrada na TV Caso n o ou a nenhum som dos alto falantes da TV antes de realizar o teste de som verifique se Selecionar Alto falante est definido como Alto falante TV no menu de som Z A melodia ser ouvida durante o teste mesmo se Selecionar Alto falante estiver definido como Alto falante Ext ou se o som tiver sido eliminado por meio da tecla MUTE e Sim Caso durante o teste de som seja poss vel ouvir o som vindo apenas de um alto falante ou de nenhum alto falante selecione Sim Pode haver um problema com a TV Entre em contato com a Central de Atendimento da Samsung para obter assist ncia e N o Caso seja poss vel ouvir o som vindo dos alto falantes selecione N o Pode haver um problema com o seu equipamento externo Verifique suas conex es Se o problema ainda persistir consulte o manual do usu rio do dispositivo externo Itensidade do Sinal apenas para canais digitais Diferente dos canais anal gicos que podem variar na qualidade da recep o de com chuviscos para n tida os canais digitais HDTV devem ter uma qualidade de recep o perfeita ou voc simplesmente n o ter sinal nenhum Portanto diferentemente dos canais anal gicos n o poss vel submeter um canal digital ao ajuste de sintonia fina Voc pode contudo aju
213. izar uma fonte externa de sinal TV AV1 AV2 Componente1 Componente2 PC HDMIM DVI HDMI2 HDMI3 HDMI4 USB S poss vel escolher entre os dispositivos externos que est o conectados TV Em Ak Lista de Entradas Editar Nome Lista de Entradas as entradas conectadas estar o destacadas e posicionadas na parte Lista de Entradas superior As entradas n o conectadas ser o colocadas na parte inferior 7 Caso dispositivos USB estejam conectados aos conectores USB1 HDD e USB2 eles ser o Bw S exibidos como USB1 e USB2 nessa sequ ncia E E Uso dos bot es coloridos do controle remoto com a Lista de Entradas Vermelho Atualizar Atualiza os dispositivos externos conectados Pressione caso sua fonte esteja ligada e conectada mas n o apare a na lista TOOLS Ferramentas Exibe os menus Editar Nome e Informa o Atualizar 21 Ferramentas Q Editar Nome VCR DVD Cabo STB Sat lite STB PVR STB Receptor AV Jogo Camcorder PC TV IPTV Blu ray HD DVD DMA Nomeie o dispositivo conectado s entradas para facilitar a sele o de sua fonte de entrada Quando um PC com resolu o de 1920 x 1080 60Hz conectado porta HDMI IN3 DVI IN necess rio definir o modo HDMI3 DVI como DVI PC em Editar Nome no modo Entrada i Menu de suporte Guia do Produto O Guia do Produto fornece informa es sobre os recursos mais importantes da TV As descri es fornecidas
214. k or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work and to convey the resulting work The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License section 13 concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such Revised Versions of this License The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License or any later version applies to it you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used that proxy s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program Later license versions m
215. l quido Se algum item estiver faltando entre em contato com o representante Acor e o formato dos itens podem variar dependendo do modelo Controle remoto e pilhas AAA x 2 Q CD do programa Cabo de for a KI Tampa inferior 2 Parafuso do suporte Certificado de garantia M4 X L16 Certificado de registro Guia de seguran a Portugu s 2 Pano de limpeza Cabo suporte fio dependendo do modelo ii Visualizando o painel de controle Acor e o formato do produto podem variar dependendo do modelo 7 poss vel ativar os bot es do painel frontal tocando os com o seu dedo SOURCE MENU VOL CHA O POWER Pressione para ligar e desligar a TV INDICADOR DE ENERGIA Pisca e apaga com a energia ligada e acende em modo standby WV CHA Pressione para mudar os canais No menu de tela use os bot es W CH A da mesma forma que utilizaria os bot es Y e A no controle remoto VOL Pressione para aumentar ou diminuir o volume No menu de tela use os bot es VOL da mesma forma que utilizaria os bot es lt e gt no controle remoto MENU Pressione para ver o menu na tela das fun es da sua TV SOURCE 4 Alterna entre todas as fontes de entrada dispon veis No menu de tela use este bot o da mesma forma que utiliza o bot o ENTER Ls no controle remoto SENSOR DO CONTROLE REMOTO Aponte o controle remoto para este ponto na TV O ALTO FAL
216. l be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License or any later version applies to it you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used that proxy s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions However no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version 15 Disclaimer of Warranty THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
217. l permissions on material added by you to a covered work for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission Notwithstanding any other provision of this License for material you add to a covered work you may if authorized by the copyright holders of that material supplement the terms of this License with terms a Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License or b Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it or c Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version or d Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material or e Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names trademarks or service marks or f Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material or modified versions of it with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors All other non permissive additional terms are considered further restrictions within the meaning of section 10 If the Program as you rec
218. lecionar a foto desejada na Lista de fotos Pressione o bot o amarelo Repita a opera o acima para selecionar diversos arquivos de fotos A indica o Y exibida esquerda da foto selecionada Caso selecione somente um arquivo a apresenta o de slides n o ser executado Para cancelar a sele o de todos os arquivos selecionados pressione o bot o TOOLS e selecione Desmarcar Tudo Pressione o bot o gt Reproduzir ENTER C4 Os arquivos selecionados ser o utilizados na apresenta o de slides Ou Na lista de fotos pressione o bot o amarelo para selecionar as fotos desejadas Pressione o bot o TOOLS 3 Pressione o bot o A ou Y para selecionar Slide Show e em seguida pressione o bot o ENTER L lt Os arquivos selecionados ser o utilizados na apresenta o de slides i Menu de op o de apresenta o de slides 1 2 O Encerrar apresenta o de slides Iniciar apresenta o de slides Voc pode iniciar ou encerrar uma apresenta o de slides O Velocidade da apresenta o de slides Lenta Normal R pida poss vel selecionar a velocidade da apresenta o de slides Esta fun o est dispon vel somente durante uma apresenta o de slides Durante uma apresenta o de slides ou ao visualizar uma foto pressione o bot o TOOLS para definir a op o Pressione o bot o A ou Y para selecionar a op o desejada depois pressione ENTER L lt Ferramentas Normal Fad
219. lic License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program If not see lt http www gnu org licenses gt Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail If the program does terminal interaction make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode lt program gt Copyright C lt year gt lt name of author gt This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY for details type show w This is free software and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions type show c for details The hypothetical commands show w and show c should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License Of course your program s commands might be different for a GUI interface you would use an about box You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the program if necessary For more information on this and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL see lt http www gnu org licenses gt The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs If your program is a subroutine library you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library If this is what you want to do use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License But first please read
220. lied Audio Cable Not supplied 1 Connect a Video Cable between the AV IN 1 or 2 VIDEO jack on the TV and the VIDEO OUT jack on the VCR 2 Connect Audio Cables between the AV IN 1 or 2 R AUDIO L jacks on the TV and the AUDIO OUT jacks on the VCR If you have a mono non stereo VCR use a Y connector not supplied to connect to the right and left audio input jacks of the TV Alternatively connect the cable to the R jack If your VCR is stereo you must connect two cables Each VCR has a different back panel configuration When connecting a VCR match the color of the connection terminal to the cable Connecting a Digital Audio System The rear panel jacks on your TV make it easy to connect a Digital Audio System Home theater Receiver to your TV Digital Audio System TV Rear Panel a O Optical Cable Not supplied 1 Connect an Optical Cable between the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL jacks on the TV and the Digital Audio Input jacks on the Digital Audio System When a Digital Audio System is connected to the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL jack Decrease the volume of the TV and adjust the volume level with the system s volume control 4 5 1CH audio is possible when the TV is connected to an external device supporting 5 1CH 4 When the Home Theater receiver is set to On you can hear sound output from the TV s Optical jack When the TV is displaying a DTV air
221. ll currently available channels 6 041 SBTHD 05 1 TV GolboHD 07 1 Record HD Added Channels Shows all added channels gt a 2 E a Fe gt z E 5 gt Favorite Shows all favorite channels To select the favorite channels you have set up press the FAV CH button on the remote control Programmed Shows all current reserved programs Select a channel in the All Channels Added Channels or Favorite screen by pressing the A Y buttons and pressing the ENTERLS button Then you can watch the selected channel 4 Using the Color buttons with the Channel List Red Antenna Switches to Air or Cable Green Zoom Enlarges or shrinks a channel number Yellow Select Selects multiple channel lists You can perform the add delete or add to Favorite delete from Favorite function for multiple channels at the same time Select the required channels and press the Yellow button to set all the selected channels at the same time The w mark appears to the left of the selected channels TOOLS Tools Displays the Add or Delete Add to Favorite or Delete from Favorite Lock or Unlock Timer Viewing Channel Name Edit Select All or Deselect All and Auto Program menus The Options menus may differ depending on the situation Channel Status Display Icons ev A channel selected by pressing the Yellow button e A program currently being broadcast e Y A channel set as a Favorite e A reserved
222. lly adjusts the picture for the best quality when watching a film e Auto2 Automatically optimizes the video text on the screen not including closed captions when watching a film Auto Motion Plus 120Hz Off Clear Standard Smooth Custom Demo Removes drag from fast scenes with a lot of movement to provide a clearer picture If you enable Auto Motion Plus 120Hz noise may appear on the screen If this occurs set Auto Motion Plus 120Hz to Off Off Switches Auto Motion Plus 120Hz off Clear Sets Auto Motion Plus 120Hz to minimum Standard Sets Auto Motion Plus 120Hz to medium Smooth Sets Auto Motion Plus 120Hz to maximum Custom Adjusts the blur and judder reduction level to suit your preference Blur Reduction Adjusts the blur reduction level from video sources Judder Reduction Adjusts the judder reduction level from video sources when playing films Reset Reset the custom settings e Demo Displays the difference between Auto Motion Plus 120Hz on and off modes Blue Only Mode Off On This function is for AV device measurement experts This function displays the blue signal only by removing the red and green signals from the video signal so as to provide a Blue Filter effect that is used to adjust the Color and Tint of video equipment such as DVD players Home Theaters etc Using this function you can adjust the Color and Tint to preferred values appropriate to the signal level of each video device using t
223. lt M todo 3 gt TE SAMSUNG ec Stoetncom pisa He Shwe Sem Hip Sever Meda Play pce Seow Seva Meda Play rece Shad ote Aplica o das configura es atuais Execute este procedimento quando for necess rio efetuar uma sincroniza o devido a uma nova pasta compartilhada ou ao cancelamento de um compartilhamento O menu Set Changed State aplica altera es de pastas compartilhadas aos dados salvos com o programa de compartilhamento do PC Como a aplica o de altera es aos dados internos um processo que consome muito tempo esta fun o permite que os usu rios apliquem altera es aos dados somente quando necess rio At o menu Set Changed State ser selecionado o status alterado da pasta compartilhada n o aplicado ao servidor Altera es s pastas compartilhadas n o s o aplicadas ao PC at voc selecionar o menu Set Changed State e M todo 1 Selecione o menu Share e selecione o submenu Refresh DB e M todo 2 Clique no cone Set Changed State lt M todo 1 gt lt M todo 2 gt E senso PC sra erage TE seuna Pc Share anager M e aa EE Seve Meda Plav rose 1 DES Sra Meda Py Pos hie pig charge on PE Portugu s 59 Configura o das permiss es de acesso Para permitir que a TV encontre o seu computador o aplicativo Samsung PC Share Manager deve estar configorado com a op o Set Device Policy na janela de Configura e
224. lt http www gnu org philosophy why not lgpl html gt E LICENSE ISSUES The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license i e both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit See below for the actual license texts Actually both licenses are BSD style Open Source licenses In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssi core Dopenssl org OpenSSL License Copyright c 1998 2007 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssi core Dopenssl org 5 Products d
225. ma de udio digital estiver conectado ao conector DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL Diminua o volume da TV e ajuste o n vel do volume com o controle de volume do sistema udio 5 1 CH poss vel quando a TV est conectada a um dispositivo externo que ofere a suporte a tal tecnologia Quanto o receptor do home theater estiver ajustado em On voc poder ouvir a reprodu o de som pelo conector ptico da TV Quando a TV estiver exibindo um sinal DTV a reo a TV emitir um som de 5 1 canais ao receiver do home theater Quando a fonte um componente digital como um receptor de DVD player Blu ray player Cabo Sat lite e estiver conectada TV via HDMI somente ser ouvido som de 2 canais do receptor do home theater Caso deseje ouvir udio 5 1 CH conecte o conector digital audio out do receptor do DVD player Blu ray player Cabo Sat lite diretamente a um Amplificador ou Home theater e n o TV Portugu s 10 a Como conectar um amplificador DVD Home Theater Amplificador DVD Home Theater Painel traseiro da TV O Cabo de udio n o fornecido 1 Conecte os cabos de udio entre as entradas AUDIO OUT R AUDIO L da TV e as entradas Audio Input do amplificador DVD home theater Quando um amplificador de udio estiver conectado aos conectores AUDIO OUT R AUDIO L Diminua o volume da TV e ajuste o n vel do volume com o controle de volume do amplificador Cada Amplificador DVD Home Theater po
226. menor e tem instalado o recurso de codifica o HDCP High Bandwidth Digital Copy Protection Prote o de Conte do Digital de Alta Largura de Banda Pode n o sair som da TV ou as imagens podem ser exibidas com cores anormais quando o DVD Player Blu ray player Cabo Receptor ou decodificador de Sat lite Set Top Box suportarem vers es HDMI anteriores 1 3 Se conectar um cabo HDMI mais antigo e n o ouvir o som conecte o cabo HDMI entrada HDMI IN3 DVI IN e os cabos de udio s entradas DVI IN AUDIO na parte traseira da TV Se isto acontecer entre em contato com a empresa fornecedora do DVD player Blu ray player Cabo receptor de sat lite para confirmar a vers o HDMI em seguida solicite uma atualiza o Cabos HDMI diferentes da vers o 1 3 podem causar dist rbios de cintila o na imagem ou podem impedir a exibi o da imagem al Conex o de um DVD Blu ray player Decodificador Receptor de sat lite Set Top Box por meio de DVI S se aplica se existe o conector de sa da DVI no dispositivo externo DVD Blu ray player Decodificador Decodificador de Sat lite Set Top Box Painel traseiro da TV O Cabo DVI para HDMI n o fornecido Ui Cabo de udio n o fornecido 1 Conecte um cabo DVI a HDMI ou adaptador DVI HDMI entre a entrada HDMI IN3 DVI IN da TV e a entrada DVI do DVD Blu ray player Decodificador Recepto
227. menu Ferramentas Tamb m poss vel definir o modo de imagem selecionando Som Modo de Som Padr o Seleciona o modo de som padr o g Desligado M sica Destaca a m sica sobre as vozes Filme Fornece o melhor som para filmes Voz Destacada Deixa a voz em destaque em rela o aos outros sons Personalizado Retorna s configura es de som personalizadas Personalizado gt O Equalizador Voc pode ajustar as defini es de som de acordo com a sua prefer ncia e Modo Seleciona o modo de som entre as configura es predefinidas e Balan o L R Ajusta o equil brio entre o alto falante direito e esquerdo e 100Hz 300Hz 1KHz 3KHz 10KHz Ajuste de largura de banda Para ajustar o nivel de diferentes frequ ncias de largura de banda e Restaurar Padr es Restaura as configura es de equalizador para os valores padr o Q SRS TruSurround HD Desligado Ligado TruSurround HD uma tecnologia patenteada SRS que resolve o problema de reprodu o de conte do em m ltiplos canais 5 1 em dois alto falantes A tecnologia TruSurround possibilita uma fascinante experi ncia de som ambiental virtual em qualquer sistema de reprodu o com dois alto falantes incluindo os alto falantes internos da televis o totalmente compat vel com todos os formatos multicanais Q Idioma do Audio poss vel alterar o valor padr o de idiomas de udio Exibe as informa es de idioma para o fluxo de entrada Ao ver um
228. mme starting time order Q Default Guide Mini Guide Full Guide You can decide whether to display either the Mini Guide or the Full Guide when the GUIDE button on the remote control is pressed Q Channel List For detailed procedures on using the Channel List refer to the Managing Channels instructions refer to pages 17 18 You can select these options by simply pressing the CH LIST button on the remote control O Fine Tune analog channels only Use fine tuning to manually adjust a particular channel for optimal reception If you do not store the fine tuned channel in memory adjustments are not saved 2 will appear next to the name of fine tuned channels To reset the fine tuning setting press the Y button to select Reset then press the ENTER Ls button O LNA Low Noise Amplifier On Off If the TV is operating in a weak signal area the LNA function can improve the reception a low noise preamplifier boosts the incoming signal LNA functions only when antenna is set to Air or Cable The LNA setting must be made separately for each channel If the picture is noisy with the LNA set to On select Off English 15 Q Color System gt Auto PAL M PAL N NTSC Selects a color system suitable for the input video signals This function is available only in analog TV mode Using the Full Mini Guide To Then Watch a programme in the EPG list Select a programme by pressing the A V lt
229. n the making of an exact copy The resulting work is called a modified version of the earlier work or a work based on the earlier work A covered work means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program To propagate a work means to do anything with it that without permission would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy Propagation includes copying distribution with or without modification making available to the public and in some countries other activities as well To convey a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies Mere interaction with a user through a computer network with no transfer of a copy is not conveying An interactive user interface displays Appropriate Legal Notices to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that 1 displays an appropriate copyright notice and 2 tells the user that there is no warranty for the work except to the extent that warranties are provided that licensees may convey the work under this License and how to view a copy of this License If the interface presents a list of user commands or options such as a menu a prominent item in the list meets this criterion Source Code The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modi
230. n press the P SIZE button on the remote control repeatedly to change the picture size 16 9 Sets the picture to 16 9 wide mode Zoom1 Magnifies the size of the picture on the screen Zoom2 Magnifies the size of the picture more than Zoom1 Wide Fit Enlarges the aspect ratio of the picture to fit the entire screen 4 3 Sets the picture to 4 3 normal mode Screen Fit Use the function to see the full image without any cut off when HDMI 720p 1080i 1080p Component 1080i 1080p or DTV 1080i signals are input nate Es 4 Zoom2 amp Move a ahha ae Wide Fit Move Wide Fit 4 3 Screen Fit When Double mm ME mode has been set in PIP the Picture Size cannot be set Temporary image retention may occur when viewing a static image on the set for more than two hours After selecting Zoom1 Zoom2 or Wide Fit Press the gt button to Select Position then press the ENTER Ls button Press the A or Y button to move the picture up and down Then press the ENTER L lt button Press the gt button to Select Size then press the ENTER L lt button Press the A or Y button to magnify or reduce the picture size in the vertical direction Then press the ENTER LS button After selecting Screen Fit in HDMI 1080i 1080p or Component 1080i 1080p mode you made need to center the picture Press the lt or gt button to select Position then press the ENTER LS button Press the A Y lt or gt butt
231. n terminated and not permanently reinstated you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10 Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer to peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance However nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or propagating a covered work you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so 10 Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients 11 12 13 Each time you convey a covered work the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors to run modify and propagate that work subject to this License You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License An entity transaction is a transaction transferring control of an organization or substantially all assets of one or subdividing an organization or merging organizations If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party s predecessor in interest had or could give under the previou
232. n you play DLNA video over IEEE 802 11B G connection the video may not be played smoothly If the wireless IP sharer allows you to turn the Ping connection function on off turn it on Select a channel for the wireless IP sharer that is not currently being used If the channel set for the wireless IP sharer is currently being used by another device nearby this will result in interference and communications may fail If you apply a security system other than the systems listed blow it will not work with the TV When applying the security key for the AP wireless IP sharer only the following is supported 1 Authentication Mode OPEN SHARED WPAPSK WPA2PSK 2 Encryption Type WEP TKIP AES When applying the security key for the Ad hoc mode only the following is supported 1 Authentication Mode SHARED WPANONE 2 Encryption Type WEP TKIP AES If your AP supports WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup you can connect to the network via PBC Push Button Configuration or PIN Personal Indentification Number WPS will automatically configure the SSID and WPA key in either mode Ifthe device isn t certified it may not connect to the TV via the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter Ss 8s D 8 BS T TE English 33 E Setting the Network Q Network Type Select Cable or Wireless as the method to connect to the network The menu is activated only if the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter is connected 4 Network Type Cable
233. nd change under these terms To do so attach the following notices to the program It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found lt one line to give the program s name and a brief idea of what it does gt Copyright C lt year gt lt name of author gt This program is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 3 of the License or at your option any later version This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program If not see lt http www gnu org licenses gt Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail If the program does terminal interaction make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode lt program gt Copyright C lt year gt lt name of author gt This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY for details type show w This is free software and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions type
234. nd select an item Select the currently selected item While playing a slide show movie or music file ENTERC Pressing the ENTER Ls button during play pauses the play Pressing the ENTER Ls button during pause resumes the play gt m Play or pause the Slide Show music or movie RETURN Return to the previous menu TOOLS Run various functions from the Photo Music and Movie menus E Stop the current slide show Music or Movie file lt p gt Jump to previous group Jump to next group INFO Show file information MEDIA P Exit Media Play mode vV CHA EXIT TV Stop Media Play mode and Returns to TV mode i Media Play Function This function enables you to view and listen to photo music and or movie files saved on a USB Mass Storage Class MSC device Entering the Media Play USB amp DLNA Menu 1 Press the MENU button Press the A or Y button to select Application then press the ENTER LS button 2 Press the A or Y button to select Media Play USB amp DLNA then press the ENTERLS button The Media Play USB amp DLNA menu is displayed s1 SUM Movie Setup D Return Press the MEDIA P button on the remote control to display the Media Play menu Press the SOURCE button on the remote control to view the source list Then Press the A or Y button to select USB 3 Press the Red button then press the A or Y button to select the TV memory or USB Memory Press the ENTER Ls button This
235. nect the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter to the USB1 HDD or USB2 port of the TV TV Side Panel Mobile phone f Samsung Wireless or LAN Adapter or Hira 5 EDHE Pe 2 For more information on how to configure Ad hoc network refer to page 35 7 For information on configuring the mobile phone s network settings refer to the mobile phone manual 3 Setup the IP address SSID and password for the mobile phone in the Ad hoc Settings of the mobile phone using the Network Name SSID and Security Key password displayed on the TV e Connecting through a wire wireless IP sharer 1 Connect the LAN port of the TV and the Wire Wireless IP sharer using the LAN cable or connect the USB1 HDD or USB2 port of the TV and the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter 7 For the procedures to set up the wire wireless sharer and the mobile phone refer to the manual of the corresponding device Mobile phone LAN Cable TV Side Panel pa ee or Mobile phone i l CO gt e E Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter English 74 E Setting Up the Home Network Center Q Message Shows a list of mobile phones which have been set up with this TV to use the message function the call arrivals text message contents and sc
236. nes de ouvido Vendido separadamente Voc pode conectar um conjunto de fones de ouvido ao seu aparelho se quiser assistir a um programa de TV sem incomodar as outras pessoas que est o na mesma sala A utiliza o da fun o de udio fica restrita ao conectar fones de ouvido TV O uso prolongado de fones de ouvido em um volume alto pode prejudicar sua audi o Voc n o ouvir o som dos alto falantes quando conectar os fones de ouvido TV O volume do fone de ouvido e da TV s o ajustados separadamente Portugu s 26 CONFIGURACAO E Menu de Configura o OQ Idioma Plug amp Play Voc pode configurar o idioma do menu 2 CR Portugu s gt Tempo WU Tempo Para procedimentos detalhados sobre as op es de configura o consulte as instru es Closed Canton Ajuste do hor rio consulte a p gina 29 30 Q Modo Jogo Desligado Ligado Ao se conectar a um console de videogame como PlayStation ou Xbox voc poder ter uma experi ncia mais real selecionando o menu jogo Restri es do Modo Jogo cuidado Para desconectar o console de jogo e conectar outro dispositivo externo ajuste Modo Jogo para Desligado no menu de configura o Se voc exibir o menu da TV no Modo Jogo a tela oscilar levemente Modo Jogo n o est dispon vel no modo PC e TV regular Enquanto o modo PIP estiver funcionando n o poss vel utilizar a fun o Modo Jogo Se a imagem estiver ruim quando o
237. ng the Stand Remove four screws from the back of the TV 2 Separate the stand from the TV Two or more people should carry the TV 3 Cover the bottom hole with the cover E Assembling the Cables Enclose the cables in the Holder Wire Cable so that the cables are not visible through the transparent stand English 80 E Wall Mount Kit Specifications VESA Install your wall mount on a solid wall perpendicular to the floor When attaching to other building materials please contact your nearest dealer If installed on a ceiling or slanted wall it may fall and result in severe personal injury Product Family inches VESA Spec Ax B Standard Screw Quantity 19 22 100 x 100 M4 23 29 200 x 100 30 40 200 x 200 M6 ee 46 55 400 x 400 j 57 70 800 x 400 M8 80 1400 x 800 42 50 400 x 400 58 63 600 x 400 FOPIN 70 800 x 400 we 80 1400 x 800 30 39 200 x 200 M6 40 52 400 x 400 LFE 55 70 800 x 400 M8 4 70 1400 x 800 Standard dimensions for wall mount kits are shown in the table above When purchasing our wall mount kit a detailed installation manual and all parts necessary for assembly are provided Do not use screws longer than the standard dimension as they may cause damage to the inside of the TV set For wall mounts that do not comply with the VESA standard screw specifications the length of
238. nged e g IP Address 123 456 789 2 Connect the PC to which the Samsung PC Share Manager program will be installed and the external modem using a LAN 1 cable You can connect the TV to the PC directly without connecting it through a Sharer Router English 57 fl Installing the DLNA Application To play content on the PC on the TV you have to first install the application To use the DLNA function smoothly use the program in the CD ROM supplied with the TV or use the Samsung PC Share Manager program corresponding to the TV model that can be downloaded from the Samsung web site System Requirements 1 Insert the Programme CD supplied with this TV into your PC 2 30MB of free hard disk space is needed for the programme installation If you share files up to 30MB of hard disk drive space is required for each 100 files If you cancel file sharing the hard disk drive space used for the thumbnail information is also freed Supported Formats e Image JPEG Audio MP3 Video AVI MKV ASF MP4 3GPP PS TS container For detailed supported video formats refer to the Playing a Movie File instructions Install the application 1 Run the Setup exe file on the Programme CD supplied with the product Alternatively you can download the file from www samsung com 2 Install the SAMSUNG PC Share Manager as shown in the figures 3 When the installation is complete the PC Share Manager icon appears on your Desktop D
239. nta o de slides Sair da apresenta o de slides e retornar lista de fotos Mudar a velocidade de reprodu o da apresenta o lt p gt de slides TOOLS Executar v rias fun es dos menus de foto Portugu s 44 Reprodugao do grupo atual 1 oP ON g Pressione o bot o A para ir se o de chave de sele o Prefer ncia Pressione o bot o lt ou para selecionar um padr o de classifica o TT eee Pressione o bot o Y para ir se o de lista de grupo Selecione um grupo usando os bot es lt e gt Pressione o bot o gt Reproduzir Um slide show come a com os arquivos do grupo selecionado Ou Selecione uma chave de sele o e em seguida na se o de lista de arquivos selecione as fotos contidas no grupo desejado Para navegar para o grupo anterior pr ximo pressione o bot o lt lt REW ou gt gt FF Pressione o bot o TOOLS Pressione o bot o A ou Y para selecionar Repr grupo atual em seguida pressione o bot o ENTER C Somente as fotos do grupo de classifica o que inclui os arquivos selecionados ser o utilizadas na apresenta o de slides Para executar uma apresenta o de slides utilizando somente os arquivos selecionados 1 2 3 4 1 2 Pressione o bot o Y para selecionar a se o de lista de arquivos Pressione o bot o lt ou para se
240. nto USB e ent o conectar o dispositivo sua TV Para usar o DLNA a TV deve estar conectada rede e o aplicativo DLNA deve estar instalado no PC Diagrama de conex o de Rede cabo Modem externo ADSLIVDSLITV a cabo Diagrama de conex o de Rede sem fio Painel lateral da TV TV K cat Adaptador de rede A sem fio Samsung 7 gt As K i ER TE Adaptador de rede sem fio Samsung 4 Compartilhador de IP sem fio Cabo de rede 1 Para mais informa es sobre como configurar sua rede consulte Configura o de Rede Recomenda se que voc coloque a TV e o PC na mesma sub rede As primeiras tr s partes do endere o IP da TV e do PC devem ser as mesmas somente a ltima parte o endere o do host deve ser diferente ex Endere o IP 123 456 789 2 Conecte o PC em que o programa Samsung PC Share Manager sera instalado e o modem externo usando um cabo de rede LAN Voc pode conectar a TV ao PC diretamente sem utilizar um distribuidor roteador Portugu s 56 fl Instalagao do aplicativo DLNA Para reproduzir conte do do PC na TV voc deve primeiro instalar o aplicativo Para usar a fun o de DLNA corretamente use o programa no CD ROM fornecido com a TV ou use o programa correspondente ao modelo de T
241. ntonia Fina pressione o bot o Y para selecionar Restaurar Padr es e ent o pressione ENTERLS Q LNA Low Noise Amplifier Ligado Desligado Se a TV estiver operando em uma rea de sinal fraco a fun o LNA poder melhorar a recep o um pr amplificador de baixo ru do aumenta o sinal de entrada LNA funciona somente quando a antena definida em Ar ou Cabo A defini o de LNA deve ser feita separadamente para cada canal Se a imagem apresentar ru do com a fun o LNA definida como Ligado selecione Desligado Portugu s 15 QO Sistema de Cor Auto PAL M PAL N NTSC Seleciona um sistema de cor adequado aos sinais de entrada de video Esta fun o est dispon vel somente no modo de TV anal gica Using the Integral Mini Guia Guia Completo Mini Guia W 2Hora NM 2 Horas EM Exit Para Ent o Assistir a um programa da lista EPG Selecione um programa pressionando os bot es A V lt 4 gt Sair do guia Pressione o azul verde Se o programa seguinte estiver selecionado ele estar marcado com a exibi o do cone de rel gio Ao pressionar o bot o ENTERL lt novamente pressione o bot o 4 gt para selecionar a op o Canc Agendamentos o agendamento cancelado e o cone removido Visualizar informa es de programa o Selecione o programa de sua prefer ncia pressionando os bot es A V lt gt Depois pressione o bot o INFO quando o programa escolhido es
242. ntributor s essential patent claims are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor whether already acquired or hereafter acquired that would be infringed by some manner permitted by this License of making using or selling its contributor version but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version For purposes of this definition control includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License Each contributor grants you a non exclusive worldwide royalty free patent license under the contributor s essential patent claims to make use sell offer for sale import and otherwise run modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version In the following three paragraphs a patent license is any express agreement or commitment however denominated not to enforce a patent such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement To grant such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party If you convey a covered work knowingly relying on a patent license and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy free of charge and under the terms of this License through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means then you must
243. o 3 stars can be selected The stars are for grouping purposes only For example the 3 star setting does not have any priority over the one star setting English 48 E Music List Option Menu 1 Press the MEDIA P button 2 Press the lt or gt button to select Music then press the ENTER 4 button 3 Press the A button to move to the File List Section 4 Press the lt or gt button to select the desired Music file Selecting Multiple Music Files Press the lt or gt button to select the desired music file Then press the Yellow button Repeat the above operation to select multiple music files The mark v appears to the selected music file 5 Press the TOOLS button The option menu changes according to the current status O Play Current Group Using this menu you can only play music files in the currently selected sorting group O Copy Copy Current Group Copy the selected file When multiple files are selected Select the music to copy Alternatively select multiple files by pressing the Yellow button Press the TOOLS button to select Copy or Copy Current Group Copy the selected file The files on the USB device are saved to the TV memory You can only copy the files saved on the USB device When the TV memory is full files cannot be copied Q Delete Delete All Delete Selected File When multiple files are selected Select the file to delete Alternatively select multiple files by pressing th
244. o aperte os parafusos com muita for a pois isso pode danificar o produto ou ocasionar a queda dele o que pode resultar em ferimentos pessoais A Samsung n o se responsabiliza por esses tipos de acidentes A Samsung n o se responsabiliza por danos ao produto nem ferimentos pessoais quando for usado um suporte para parede que n o seja VESA ou n o seja o especificado ou no caso de o cliente n o seguir as instru es de instala o do produto Nossos modelos de 57 e 63 n o est o em conformidade com as especifica es VESA Por isso necess rio utilizar o nosso kit especial de montagem na parede indicado para este modelo N o ultrapasse 15 graus de inclina o ao montar esta TV se be 5D SS SBS AOS ZA N o instale o kit de montagem em parede enquanto a TV estiver ligada Isso pode causar ferimentos devido a choques el tricos Portugu s 79 ij Trava anti furto Kensington A trava Kensington um dispositivo usado para proteger fisicamente o sistema quando usado em um local p blico A apar ncia e o m todo de bloqueio podem ser diferentes daqueles apresentados na ilustra o dependendo do fabricante Consulte o manual fornecido com a trava Kensington para utiliz la adequadamente O dispositivo de bloqueio precisa ser adquirido separadamente A posi o da trava Kensington poder ser diferente dependendo do modelo 1 Insira o dispositivo de bloqueio no conector Kensington da TV LCD e gire o na di
245. o este televisor j est preparado para uma liga o a cabo n o necess rio um decodificador para ver os canais da televis o a cabo decodificados Fazer a liga o a um decodificador para todos os canais 1 Localize o cabo conectado ao terminal ANT OUT no decodificador _ Esse terminal pode ser identificado como ANT OUT sa da da antena VHF OUT ANTIN ANTOUT Kra r sa da VHF ou simplesmente OUT sa da LN ANT 2 IN CABLE 2 Conecte a outra extremidade do cabo ao terminal da ANT 2 IN CABLE na parte traseira da TV gt Fazer a liga o a um decodificador que serve para alguns canais Se o decodificador servir apenas para alguns canais como os canais premium seguir as instru es abaixo Vai precisar de um separador de duas vias um alternador RF A B e quatro metros de cabo RF Estes acess rios est o dispon veis na maioria das lojas de eletr nica ANT 2 IN CABLE Cabo de entrada Separador Decodificador 1 Localize e desconecte o cabo conectado ao terminal ANT IN no decodificador Esse terminal pode ser identificado como ANT IN entrada da antena VHF IN entrada de VHF ou simplesmente IN entrada Conecte o cabo ao divisor de duas vias Conecte um cabo RF entre o terminal OUTPUT sa da no divisor e o terminal IN entrada no decodificador Conecte um cabo RF entre o terminal ANT OUT no decodificador e o term
246. o para desligar Defina hora minuto am pm e ativar inativar Para ativar o timer com a configura o correspondente configure para Ativado Volume Selecione o n vel de volume desejado Fonte TV USB Mem ria da TV poss vel selecionar que conte do da TV da mem ria da TV ou do dispositivo USB ser o reproduzidos quando a TV ligar automaticamente Selecione TV Mem ria da TV ou USB Verifique se o dispositivo USB est conectado sua TV Quando h somente um arquivo de fotos no dispositivo USB ou na Mem ria da TV a apresenta o de slides n o ser reproduzida Antena quando Entrada estiver definida como TV Selecione ar ou cabo Portugu s 29 Canal quando Entrada estiver definida como TV Selecione o canal desejado Conte do quando Entrada estiver definida como USB ou Mem ria da TV poss vel selecionar uma pasta no dispositivo USB Mem ria da TV com arquivos de m sica ou foto para que sejam reproduzidos quando a TV ligar automaticamente Se o nome da pasta for muito longo n o ser poss vel selecionar a pasta Se estiver usando duas unidades do mesmo tipo de dispositivo USB verifique se os nomes das pastas s o diferentes o que permitir que o dispositivo correto seja lido Repetir Selecione Uma vez Di rio Seg Sex Seg S b S b Dom ou Manual Quando a op o Manual selecionada pressione o bot o gt para selecionar o dia desejado da semana Pressione o bot o ENTER lt so
247. oc se conectar internet sua TV pode n o poder se conectar internet porque o endere o MAC difere do endere o do dispositivo PC Neste caso solicite ao provedor os procedimentos para conectar outros dispositivos que n o o PC como a TV Internet Se voc n o conseguir se conectar internet mesmo seguindo os procedimentos passados pelo provedor entre em contato com um Centro de servi o Samsung Electronics e Selecionar uma rede Ponto de acesso poss vel selecionar o distribuidor IP ao usar uma rede sem fio Se um ponto de acesso sem fio n o estiver na lista de pontos de acesso pressione o bot o vermelho 7 Quando a conex o for completada voc retornar tela anterior Configura o de Rede sem fio automaticamente Chave de Seguran Se tiver selecionado um ponto de acesso com uma autentica o de seguran a nes Excluir Atela de inser o de chave de seguran a ser exibida Digite a chave de Sie seguran a e pressione o bot o azul no controle remoto Se o tipo de criptografia de seguran a for WEP os n meros de 0 a 9 e as letras a alae Aa F estar o dispon veis ao digitar a chave de seguran a Conectando WPS Configura o wi fi protegida e Sea Chave de Seguran a j est definida Na lista de pontos de acesso selecione WPS poss vel selecionar PBC PIN Chave de Seguran a Configura o de Rede sem fio Selecionar uma rede sson Mover C Entrar O Retornar Conex o
248. oferecem suporte ao modo ad hoc podem ser conectados sem DHCP Beste ve ede 1 Defina o Tipo de Rede como Sem Fio a 2 Selecione Configura o de Rede Sem Fio 3 Defina Configura o de Rede como Config Autom tica O IP configurado automaticamente Configura o de Rede sem fio Mover C Entrar O Retornar Selecione uma rede atrav s de Selecionar uma rede 5 Selecione Teste de Rede para verificar a conectividade da rede Configura o de Rede sem fio Configura o Manual x g Configura o de Rede sem fio 1 Defina o Tipo de Rede como Sem Fio Configura o de Rede Config Manual 2 Selecione Configura o de Rede Sem Fio Teste de Rede Selecionar uma rede 3 Defina Configura o de Rede como Config Manual ATE ndere o IP 4 Configure Endere o IP M scara de Sub rede Gateway e Servidor DNS M scara de Sutztedp Gateway Pressione os bot es num ricos no controle remoto ao configurar a rede manualmente EIOS Selecione uma rede atrav s de Selecionar uma rede Selecione Teste de Rede para verificar a conectividade da rede Mover C Entrar O Retornar Oa Portugu s 36 ENTRADA SUPORTE E Menu de Entrada Q Lista de Entradas Use para selecionar a TV ou outras fontes de entrada externa como DVD Blu Ray players ou cabos receptores de sat lite Set Top Box conectadas TV Use para selecionar a fonte de entrada escolhida Pressione o bot o SOURCE no controle remoto para visual
249. omatically after completing the firmware upgrade Please check the firmware version after the upgrades are complete the new version will have a higher number than the older version When software is upgraded video and audio ETETEN 2009 11 16 000000 settings you have made will return to their default factory settings We recommend you write down your settings so that you can easily reset them after the upgrade toa T cb EE USB Drive Software Upgrade By USB gt Move Enter 5 Return Alternative Software Backup If there is an issue with the new firmware and it is affecting operation you can change the software to the previous version If software was changed existing software is displayed You can change current software to alternative software by Alternative Software English 38 Q HD Connection Guide This menu presents the connection method that provides the optimal quality for the HD TV Refer to this information when connecting external devices to the TV Q Contact Samsung View this information when your TV does not work properly or when you want to upgrade the software You can view the information regarding the call center product and software file download method English 39 MEDIA PLAY USB amp DLNA E Connecting a USB Device 1 Press the POWER button to turn the TV on TV Side Panel 2 Connect a USB device containing photo music and or movie files to
250. on Press the TOOLS button Press the A or Y button to select Play Current Group then press the ENTER CC button Only the photos in the sorting group including the selected files will be used for the Slide Show English 45 To perform a Slide Show with only the selected files 1 Press the Y button to select the File List Section 2 Press the lt or gt button to select the desired photo in the Photo list 3 Press the Yellow button 4 Repeat the above operation to select multiple photos The Y mark appears to the left of the selected photo If you select one file the Slide Show will not be performed To deselect all selected files press the TOOLS button and select Deselect All 5 Press the gt Play ENTER Ls button The selected files will be used for the Slide Show Alternatively In the Photo List press the Yellow buttons to select the desired photos Press the TOOLS button Press the A or Y button to select Slide Show then press the ENTER C button The selected files will be used for the Slide Show a Slide Show Option Menu 1 During a slide show or when viewing a photo press the TOOLS button to set the option 2 Press the A or Y button to select the desired option then press the ENTER Ls button on so O Stop Slide Show Start Slide Show You can start or stop a SlideShow M S Move C Enter p Exit Q Slide Show Speed Slow Normal Fast You can sel
251. on to move the picture Reset Press the lt or gt button to select Reset then press the ENTER 4 button You can initialize the setting HD High Definition 16 9 1080i 1080p 1920x1080 720p 1280x720 Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have connected to an input of the TV Input Source Picture Size ATV AV Component 480i 480p 16 9 Zoom1 Zoom2 4 3 DTV 1080i Component 1080i 1080p HDMI 720p 1080i 1080p PC 16 9 4 3 16 9 4 3 Wide Fit Screen Fit English 21 Digital NR gt Off Low Medium High Auto If the broadcast signal received by your TV is weak you can activate the Digital Noise Reduction feature to help reduce any static and ghosting that may appear on the screen When the signal is weak select one of the other options until the best picture is displayed HDMI Black Level Normal Low You can select the black level on the screen to adjust the screen depth This function is active only when an external device is connected to the TV via HDMI The HDMI HDMI Black Level function may not be compatible with all external devices Film Mode Off Auto1 Auto2 The TV can be set to automatically sense and process film signals from all sources and adjust the picture for optimum quality Film mode is supported in TV Video Component 480i 1080i and HDMI 480i 1080i e Off Turn the Film Mode function off e Auto1 Automatica
252. one v rios arquivos pressionando o bot o amarelo Pressione o bot o TOOLS para selecionar Excluir ou Excluir tudo Apagar arq selecionado Os arquivos s o exclu dos Voc s pode excluir arquivos salvos na mem ria da TV N o poss vel recuperar um arquivo exclu do Q Reproduzir o grupo atual Usando este menu voc pode reproduzir uma apresenta o de slides usando s os arquivos de fotos no grupo de classifica o atualmente selecionado Portugu s 43 Q Alterar Grupo Quando a classifica o for porCor poss vel modificar as informa es de cor de um arquivo de foto ou de um grupo de arquivos para mov los de um grupo de cor para outro Isto n o modifica as cores reais da foto As informa es de grupo do arquivo atual s o atualizadas e as fotos s o movidas para o novo grupo de cor Para mudar a informa o de v rios arquivos selecione os arquivos desejados pressionando o bot o amarelo Q Desmarcar Tudo Quando pelo menos um arquivo estiver selecionado Voc pode cancelar a sele o de todos os arquivos A marca Y indicando que o arquivo correspondente est selecionado fica oculta O Informa es As informa es do arquivo de foto incluindo nome tamanho resolu o data de modifica o e o caminho s o exibidas Voc pode visualizar as informa es de arquivos de foto durante uma apresenta o de slides usando os mesmos procedimentos Pressione o bot o INFO para visualizar as
253. or gt En rgico Harm nico Triste Empolgante Calmo Nao classi Classifica os arquivos de m sica por clima poss vel modificar as informa es de clima da m sica Q G nero Classifica os arquivos de m sica por g nero O Pasta Classifica os arquivos de m sica por pasta Se existirem muitas pastas no dispositivo USB os arquivos s o exibidos na ordem em cada pasta O arquivo de m sica na pasta raiz exibido primeiro e os outros s o exibidos em ordem alfab tica por nome O Prefer ncia gt wi kkk li dede Classifica os arquivos de musica por prefer ncia E possivel modificar as prefer ncias dos arquivos de musica Altera o das configura es de favoritos Selecione a m sica desejada na lista de m sicas em seguida pressione o bot o verde repetidamente at aparecer a configura o desejada At 3 estrelas podem ser selecionadas As estrelas s o somente para fins de agrupamento Por exemplo a configura o de 3 estrelas n o possui prioridade sobre a configura o de uma estrela Portugu s 47 a Menu de op o de lista de m sicas 1 Pressione o bot o MEDIA P 2 Pressione o bot o lt ou gt para selecionar Music e em seguida pressione ENTERLS 3 Pressione o bot o A para ir se o de lista de arquivos EN Copiar Pressione o bot o lt ou para selecionar o arquivo de m sica desejado fi 3 Fa EI a err E PORE D Informa es Sele o m ltipla de arquivos de m
254. or key for unpacking reading or copying Additional Terms Additional permissions are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License to the extent that they are valid under applicable law If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program that part may be used separately under those permissions but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions When you convey a copy of a covered work you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy or from any part of it Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work You may place additional permissions on material added by you to a covered work for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission Notwithstanding any other provision of this License for material you add to a covered work you may if authorized by the copyright holders of that material supplement the terms of this License with terms a Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License or b Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed
255. or ou com o representante da Samsung 1 Primeiro clique em Painel de controle no menu Iniciar do Windows 2 Quando a janela do painel de controle for exibida clique em Apar ncias e Temas e uma caixa de di logo ser exibida 3 Quando a janela do painel de controle for exibida clique em Exibir e uma caixa de di logo ser exibida 4 Selecione a guia Configura es na caixa de di logo e A configura o de tamanho correta resolu o Melhor 1920 X 1080 pixels e Se existir uma op o de frequ ncia vertical na caixa de di logo de ajustes do display Display Properties Themes Desktop Screen Saver Appearance Settings Drag the monitor icons to match the physical arrangement of your monitors Display 1 000 Screen resolution Color quality aa J Moe Highest 32 bi 1820 by1080pixets iff o valor correto 60 ou 60 Hz Do contr rio basta clicar em OK e sair da caixa de di logo Portugu s 23 Modos de visualiza o Se o sinal do sistema for igual ao modo de sinal padr o a tela se ajusta automaticamente Se o sinal do sistema n o for igual ao modo de sinal padr o ajuste o modo consultando o guia do usu rio da placa de v deo caso contr rio poder n o haver v deo Para os modos de visualiza o listados abaixo a imagem da tela foi otimizada durante a fabrica o D Sub e HDMI DVI Entrada Ao usar uma conex o a cabo HDMI DVI voc deve us
256. ord unplugged Is there a special fluorescent light or neon sign nearby CONNECTIONS Connecting VHF and UHF Antennas If your antenna has a set of leads that look like the diagram to the right see Antennas with 300 Q Flat Twin Leads below O C If your antenna has one lead that looks like the diagram to the right see Antennas with 75 Q Round Leads m E If you have two antennas see Separate VHF and UHF Antennas Antennas with 300 Q Flat Twin Leads 9 If you are using an off air antenna such as a roof antenna or rabbit ears that has 300Q twin flat leads follow the directions below 1 Place the wires from the twin leads under the screws on a 300 75 Q adapter not 2 supplied Use a screwdriver to tighten the screws ANT 1 IN AIR 2 Plug the adaptor into the ANT 1 IN AIR terminal on the back of the TV 2 Antennas with 75 O Round Leads ANTA IN AIR Plug the antenna lead into the ANT 1 IN AIR terminal on the back of the TV Separate VHF and UHF Antennas If you have two separate antennas for your TV one VHF and one UHF you must combine JA the two antenna signals before connecting the antennas to the TV This procedure requires an 000 leap optional combiner adaptor available at most electronics shops E ver 1 Connect both antenna leads to the combiner 2 Plug the combiner into the ANT 1 IN AIR terminal on the bottom of the rear panel
257. orrespondente est selecionado fica oculta Q Informa es As informa es do arquivo de filme incluindo nome tamanho data de modifica o e o caminho s o exibidas Pressione o bot o INFO para visualizar as informa es t O Remover com seguran a a A siz Voc pode remover o dispositivo com seguran a da TV il Reprodugao de um arquivo de filme Reprodugao de um arquivo de filme 1 Pressione o bot o Y para selecionar a se o de lista de arquivos g b 00 00 01 00 05 30 7 2 Pressione o bot o lt ou gt para selecionar um arquivo de filme a ser reproduzido n 3 Pressione o bot o gt Reproduzir ENTER C O arquivo selecionado reproduzido i P N Z O arquivo selecionado exibido na parte superior da tela com o tempo de t SSR reprodu o EARN N A dura o da reprodu o de um arquivo de filme pode ser exibida como 00 00 00 se a informa o do tempo de reprodu o n o for localizada no Ca Pausa 4P Saltar AE Ferramentas 9 Retornar in cio do arquivo Voc pode reproduzir arquivos de jogos multim dia mas n o h suporte para a fun o de jogos Portugu s 51 Formatos de legenda suportados Nome Extens o do arquivo Formato Texto baseado em tempo MPEG 4 ttxt XML SAMI smi HTML baseado em string SubRip srt baseado em string SubViewer sub Micro DVD sub ou txt baseado em string 4 Suporte a formatos de v deo Decodi
258. ortada de 15360X8640 pixels Para arquivos n o suportados ou corrompidos a mensagem Formato de arquivo n o suportado exibida Se a chave de sele o estiver em Visualiza o B sica at 1 000 arquivos podem ser exibidos em cada pasta A outra chave de sele o pode exibir at 10 000 arquivos N o poss vel reproduzir arquivos MP3 com DRM que tenham sido baixados de um site pago A Gest o de Direitos Digitais DRM Digital Rights Management uma tecnologia que suporta a cria o distribui o e gest o de conte dos de forma integrada e abrangente incluindo a prote o de direitos e interesses dos fornecedores do conte do a preven o de c pias ilegais do conte do e tamb m o gerenciamento de cobran as e de contratos Ao navegar at uma foto o tempo de carregamento pode levar alguns segundos Neste momento o cone de carregamento ser exibido na tela Se mais de 2 dispositivos PTP estiverem conectados voc s poder usar um de cada vez Se mais de um dispositivo MSC estiver conectado alguns deles podem n o ser reconhecidos Se um dispositivo requer muita energia mais que 500mA ou 5V o dispositivo USB pode n o ser suportado Se uma mensagem de advert ncia de sobrecarga Fail add new device USB1 USB2 Power Overload for exibida enquanto voc conecta ou usa um dispositivo USB o dispositivo poder n o ser reconhecido ou apresentar mau funcionamento CS 0 HH Dispositivo USB
259. ot o ENTER Ls Utiliza o do bot o do controle remoto no menu Content Library Bot o Opera es AIV lt 4 gt Move o cursor e seleciona um item ENTER C Selecionar o item atualmente selecionado RETURN Voltar ao menu anterior EXIT Interrompe a fun o atual e retorna ao menu principal da Content Library V CHA Interrompe o modo Content Library e retorna ao modo TV Bot o de cor Teclas que fornecem fun es descritas na p gina correspondente VOL MUTE poss vel controlar o volume do conte do reproduzido A CONTENT LIBRARY CONT M TEXTO GR FICOS IMAGENS MULTIM DIA E OUTROS MATERIAIS UTILIZADOS APENAS PARA FINS INFORMATIVOS E PROMOCIONAIS OS MATERIAIS DA BIBLIOTECA DE CONTE DO FORAM MODIFICADOS E S O CONSTANTEMENTE REVISADOS E ATUALIZADOS OS MATERIAIS DA CONTENT LIBRARY PODEM N O SER APROPRIADOS PARA TODOS OS P BLICOS AS INFORMA ES DA CONTENT LIBRARY S O FORNECIDAS NO ESTADO EM QUE SE ENCONTRAM EMBORA AS INFORMA ES FORNECIDAS NA CONTENT LIBRARY SEJAM OBTIDAS OU EM CONFORMIDADE COM FONTES QUE ACREDITAMOS SEREM CONFI VEIS A SAMSUNG N O PODE E N O IR GARANTIR A PRECIS O VALIDADE ATUALIDADE OU INTEGRIDADE DE QUAISQUER INFORMA ES OU DADOS DISPONIBILIZADOS PARA QUALQUER FIM ESPEC FICO SOB NENHUMA CIRCUNST NCIA INCLUINDO CULPA A SAMSUNG SER RESPONSABILIZADA EM CONTRATO OU IL CITO CIVIL POR QUAISQUER DANOS DIRETOS INDIRETOS INCIDENTAIS ESPECIAIS OU
260. ot o SOURCE para selecionar o modo PC O Ajuste Autom tico Utilize a fun o Ajuste Autom tico para que a TV ajuste automaticamente os sinais de v deo Brilho que recebe Esta fun o tamb m faz a sintonia fina autom tica das configura es e ajusta os valores e as posi es da frequ ncia A Pressione o bot o TOOLS para exibir o menu Ferramentas Tamb m poss vel definir o La Kaada Ajuste autom tico selecionando Imagem Auto Ajuste Esta fun o n o funciona no modo DVI Digital Auto Ajuste waew QO Tela Grosso Ajuste Fino O prop sito de ajustar a qualidade da imagem o de remover ou reduzir interfer ncias da imagem Se a interfer ncia n o for removida somente com a sintonia fina ent o ajuste a FER frequ ncia o melhor poss vel Grosso e realize novamente a sintonia fina Ap s ter reduzido a ipi interfer ncia ajuste novamente a imagem de modo que ela fique centralizada na tela Restaurar Imagem Posicionamento do PC Ajuste o posicionamento de tela do PC se ela n o se encaixar na tela da TV Pressione o bot o A ou Y para ajustar a posi o vertical Pressione o bot o lt ou gt para ajustar a posi o CH Entrar O Retornar horizontal Restaurar Imagem poss vel retornar todos os ajustes de imagem aos valores definidos de f brica Portugu s 24 E Menu de Som Q Modo gt Padr o M sica Filme Voz Destacada Personalizado A Pressione o bot o TOOLS para exibir o
261. ou can select a size of the sub picture Channel Q Position LJ DI E TIL You can select a position of the sub picture Move C3 Enter O Retum In Double mmj ME mode Position cannot be selected O Air Cable Air Cable Select either Air or Cable as the input source for the sub screen O Channel You can select the channel for the sub screen PC Display Setting Up Your PC Software Based on Windows XP The Windows display settings for a typical computer are shown below The actual screens on Display Properties your PC will probably be different depending upon your particular version of Windows and Tienes Desktop Seren Saver Appestance Seira your particular video card However even if your actual screens look different the same basic ag the medo icone to match the physical arangement of you motos set up information will apply in almost all cases If not contact your computer manufacturer or Samsung Dealer 1 First click on Control Panel on the Windows start menu 2 When the control panel window appears click on Appearance and Themes and a display 1 000 x dialog box will appear OO ee 3 When the control panel window appears click on Display and a display dialog box will E E appear Tt bi o cre 4 Navigate to the Settings tab on the display dialog box e The correct size setting resolution Opt
262. ouble click the icon to run the programme English 58 Using the DLNA Application The Programme Screen Layout EG SAMSUNG PC Share Manager a Lg i PNH Server Media Play PC Se gt Di 8 6 iMy Computer AN 9 Shared folder ue Ny eee Te ee RTE nn o SEES Je Foldert Folder2 1 i CoFolders r OFolder4 E H Folders H H rir e a ae 1 Menus The following application menus are provided File Share Server and Help 2 Click to share the selected PC server folder 3 Click to cancel sharing 4 Click to refresh the PC folder and files 5 Click to synchronize the share status 6 The folders and files of the PC to be shared are listed 7 Folders shared by the user are listed Q File Property Shows information on the selected file or folder e Method 1 Select a file or folder and select the File menu and then select the Property sub menu e Method 2 Select a file or folder right click over the selected file or folder and then select Property from the pop up menu lt Method 1 gt lt Method 2 gt HE SAMSUNG Pc She Manson ia TE SASU NG Postura T My Computer Shared Folder aie Bmw Te E Exit Exits the DLNA application If you select Exit without applying the changes after changing the shared status a message will appear asking if you want to apply the changed settings to the PC Select Yes to apply the changes and exit the a
263. ource code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights Therefore you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it responsibilities to respect the freedom of others For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps 1 assert copyright on the software and 2 offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify it For the developers and authors protection the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software For both users and authors sake the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them although the manufacturer can do so This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users freedom to ch
264. pelo telefone 0800 124 421 4004 0000 Problema Solu o poss vel Imagem ruim Tente outro canal Ajuste a antena Verifique todas as conex es com cabos Qualidade do som ruim Sem imagem ou som Tente outro canal Ajuste a antena Tente outro canal Pressione o bot o SOURCE Certifique se de que a TV esteja ligada na tomada Verifique as conex es da antena Sem som ou som muito baixo no volume m ximo Verifique primeiro o volume das unidades conectadas TV receptor de transmiss o digital DVD receptor de transmiss o a cabo v deo cassete etc Em seguida ajuste o volume da TV de acordo Verifique as configura es de sele o de alto falante A imagem rola verticalmente Verifique todas as conex es da fia o H um problema com a imagem Execute o teste de imagem localizado no menu Auto diagn stico H um problema com o som Execute o teste de som localizado no menu Auto diagn stico A TV funciona de maneira err tica Desligue a TV por 30 segundos em seguida tente lig la novamente ATV n o quer ligar Certifique se de que a tomada de parede esteja funcionado Problemas no funcionamento do controle remoto Substitua as pilhas do controle remoto Limpe a parte superior do controle remoto janela de transmiss o Verifique os terminais das pilhas Mensagem Verificar cabo de sinal Mensagem Modo incompat vel Verifique
265. played press and hold the MENU button on the TV for 5 seconds 4 Press the A or Y button to memorize the channels of the selected connection Press the ENTER button to select Start Air Air antenna signal Cable Cable antenna signal Air Cable Air and Cable antenna signals Z If the antenna is connected to ANT 1 IN AIR select Air and if it is connected to ANT 2 IN CABLE select Cable If both ANT 1 IN AIR and ANT 2 IN CABLE are connected select the Air Cable 5 Press the ENTER C button to select Start The TV will begin memorizing all of the available channels To stop the search before it has finished press the ENTER L button with Stop selected After all the available channels are stored it starts to remove scrambled channels The Auto program menu then reappears Press the ENTER Ls button when channel memorization is complete The message Set the Clock Mode is displayed 6 Press the ENTER C button Press the A or Y button to select Auto then Press the ENTER Ls button The message Select the time zone in which you live is displayed If you select Manual Set current date and time is displayed Idioma Portugu s C Entrar 7 Press the A or Y button to highlight the time zone for your local area Press the ENTER C button If you have received a digital signal the time will be set automatically If not refer to the Setting the Time instructions to set the clock refer to pages
266. por esta fun o s o exibidas apenas em ingl s Qualidade de Imagem Full HD 1080p m Auto Motion Plus 120Hz Modo de Imagem Medi 2 0 Internet TV Biblioteca de Conte do Flash M USB2 0 Movie DLNA sem fio Consci ncia Ambiental Modo de economia de energia Eco Material Guia do Produto auodnsg Auto Diagn stico Uso do bot o do controle remoto no menu Guia do Produto Bot o Opera es Bot o amarelo Mostra o conte do do Guia do Produto em sequ ncia Reprodu o autom tica lt gt Move o cursor e seleciona um item ENTERCS Selecionar o item atualmente selecionado RETURN Voltar ao menu anterior EXIT Interrompe a fun o atual e retorna ao menu principal do Guia do Produto Portugu s 37 O Auto Diagn stico Teste de Imagem Se achar que h um problema com a imagem realize o teste de imagem Verifique o padr o de Auto Diagn stico cor na tela para ver se o problema continua e Sim Caso o padr o de teste n o aparece ou haja ru do no padr o de teste selecione Sim NM Pode haver um problema com a TV Entre em contato com a Central de Atendimento da Samsung para obter assist ncia e Nao Caso o padr o de teste seja exibido corretamente selecione N o Pode haver um problema com o seu equipamento externo Verifique suas conex es Se o problema ainda persistir consulte o manual do usu rio do disposit
267. ported File Format message is displayed If sort key is set to Basic View up to 1000 files can be displayed in each folder The other sort key can display up to 10000 files MP3 files with DRM that have been downloaded from a non free site cannot be played Digital Rights Management DRM is a technology that supports the creation of content the distribution and management of the content in an integrated and comprehensive way including the protection of the rights and interests of the content providers the prevention of the illegal copying of contents as well as managing billings and settlements When moving to a photo loading may take a few seconds At this point the loading icon will appear at the screen If more than 2 PTP devices are connected you can only use one at a time If more than one MSC device is connected some of them may not be recognized If a device requires high power more than 500mA or 5V the USB device may not be supported If an over power Fail add new device USB1 USB2 Power Overload warning message is displayed while you are connecting or using a USB device the device may not be recognized or may malfunction CS G E USB Drive ES ES Ss SSNNNSS ES English 40 Using the Remote Control Button in Media Play Menu Button Operations AIV lt gt Move the cursor a
268. pplication Me SAMSUNG FC Share Manson a ZE Ole Sevr Medha Play FESE 7 English 59 Q Share Sharing a Folder You can share a folder from your PC to the TV The maximum number of folders that can be shared is 32 Your PC will operate as a server to the TV Method 1 Select a folder in My Computer select the Share menu and then select the Share Folder sub menu Method 2 Select a folder in My Computer right click over the selected folder and then select Share Folder from the popup menu e Method 3 Locate the mouse pointer over a folder in the My Computer folder list in the left pane and drag amp drop the folder into the Shared Folders pane If a message appears asking you to confirm the shared folder select Yes lt Method 1 gt lt Method 2 gt lt Method 3 gt a E sonia o Sra Cancelling a Shared Folder You can cancel a shared folder on your PC Select a folder from the Shared Folder pane and select Unshare Folder e Method 1 Select a folder from the Shared Folder pane select the Share menu and then select Unshare Folder e Method 2 Select a folder from the Shared Folder pane right click over the selected folder and then select Unshare Folder from the pop up menu e Method 3 Locate the mouse pointer over a folder in the Shared Folder pane and drag amp drop the folder into the My Computer pane If a message appears asking you to confirm the cancelation select Yes
269. pply to those files or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms Additional terms permissive or non permissive may be stated in the form of a separately written license or stated as exceptions the above requirements apply either way Termination You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11 However if you cease all violation of this License then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated a provisionally unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license and b permanently if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation Moreover your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License for any work from that copyright holder and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License If your rights have bee
270. procedimentos consulte o manual do telefone celular Alguns caracteres especiais podem ser exibidos como espa os em branco ou caracteres quebrados D Caso voc selecione o bot o OK o alarme de recebimento de chamada ser confirmado e a janela de alarme ser fechada Caso voc selecione o bot o Canc a janela de alarme ser exibida at tr s vezes em intervalos de 5 minutos Evento agendado Voc tem agendamento Deseja visualizar os Programar alarme ee m E a Enquanto voc assiste TV a janela de alarme exibida para mostrar a agenda programada Caso voc selecione o bot o OK ser poss vel visualizar o conte do da agenda programada no celular Caso voc selecione o bot o Canc a janela de alarme ser exibida at tr s vezes em intervalos de 5 minutos poss vel definir as configura es de exibi o do conte do agendado no telefone celular Para conhecer os procedimentos consulte o manual do telefone celular Alguns caracteres especiais podem ser exibidos como espa os em branco ou caracteres quebrados Portugu s 75 E Utiliza o da fun o de m dia Uma janela de alarme exibida para informar ao usu rio que o conte do de m dia v deos fotos m sicas enviado do telefone celular ser exibido na TV O conte do ser reproduzido automaticamente 3 segundos ap s a janela de alarme ser exibida Caso voc pressione o bot o RETURN ou EXIT quando a janela
271. program A A locked channel Channel List Option Menu in All Channels Added Channels Favorite Z Press the TOOLS button to use the option menu 2 Option menu items may differ depending on the channel status Add Delete u can delete or add a channel to display the channels you want All deleted channels will be shown on All Channels menu A gray colored channel indicates the channel has been deleted The Add menu only appears for deleted channels x Channel Name Edit Select All You can also delete a channel from the Added Channels or Favorite menu in the same manner z Q z E BBBBZ Add to Favorite Delete from Favorite You can set channels you watch frequently as Favorite A Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu You can also set the add to or delete from Favorites by selecting Tools Add to Favorite or Delete from Favorite The symbol will be displayed and the channel will be set as a favorite All favorite channels will be shown on Favorite menu English 17 Lock Unlock You can lock a channel so that the channel cannot be selected and viewed Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu You can also set the lock unlock current channels by selecting Tools Lock Current Channel or Unlock Current Channel This function is available only when the Child Lock is set to On refer to page 28 The PIN number input screen appears Enter your 4 digit PIN number
272. r Delete All Delete Selected File The files are deleted You can only delete the files saved in the TV memory You cannot recover a deleted file O Play Current Group Using this menu you can play a SlideShow using only the photo files in the currently selected sorting group Q Change Group Info When the Sort key is the Color You can change a selected photo file s or group of files color information in order to move it from one color group to another This does not change the actual color of the photo The group information of the current file is updated and the photos are moved to the new color group To change the information of multiple files select the files you want by pressing the Yellow button O Deselect All When at least one file is selected You can deselect all files The Y mark indicating the corresponding file is selected is hidden O Information The photo file information including the name the size the resolution the date modified and the path is displayed You can view the information of photo files during a SlideShow using the same procedures Press the INFO button to viewing the information CONTENT QO Safe Remove Eh You can remove the device safely from the TV Ega English 44 E Viewing a Photo or Slide Show Viewing a Slide Show 1 2 3 S Press the Y button to select the File List Section Press the TOOLS button Press the A or Y button to select Slide Show then pr
273. r added stability install the anti fall device for safety purposes as follows To avoid the TV from falling 1 Putthe screws into the clamps and firmly fasten them onto the wall Confirm that the screws have been firmly installed onto the wall You may need additional material such as an anchor depending on the type of wall amp Since the necessary clamps screws and string are not supplied please r amp purchase these additionally ad Nai a 2 Remove the screws from the center back of the TV put the screws into the clamps and then fasten the screws onto the TV again Screws may not be supplied with the product In this case please purchase the screws of the following specifications Screw Specifications Fora 17 29 Inch LCD TV M4 X 15 For a 32 40 Inch LCD TV M6 X 15 3 Connect the clamps fixed onto the TV and the clamps fixed onto the wall with a strong string and then tie the string tightly Install the TV near to the wall so that it does not fall backwards It is safe to connect the string so that the clamps fixed on the wall are equal to or Wall lower than the clamps fixed on the TV Untie the string before moving the TV 4 Verify all connections are properly secured Periodically check connections for any sign of fatigue for failure If you have any doubt about the security of your connections contact a professional installer English 82 E Specifications
274. r de sat lite Set Top Box 2 Conecte os cabos de udio entre a entrada DVI IN AUDIO da TV e o DVD Blu ray player Decodificador Receptor de sat lite Set Top Box Cada DVD Blu ray player Decodificador Receptor de sat lite Set Top Box possui uma configura o de painel traseiro diferente 7 Ao conectar um DVD Blu ray player Decodificador Receptor de sat lite Set Top Box use um terminal de conex o com a mesma cor do cabo Use a entrada HDMI IN3 DVI IN para conectar um DVI a um dispositivo externo Use um cabo DVI para HDMI ou adaptador DVI HDMI DVI para HDMI para conex o de v deo e as entradas DVI IN AUDIO para udio Ao usar uma conex o a cabo HDMI DVI voc deve usar a entrada HDMI IN3 DVI IN Ao usar uma conex o a cabo HDMI DVI voc deve usar a entrada HDMI IN3 DVI IN Portugu s 8 Conex o de um DVD Blu ray player Decodificador Receptor de sat lite Set Top Box por meio de cabos Componente As entradas do painel traseiro na TV facilitam a conex o do DVD Blu ray player Decodificador Receptor de sat lite Set Top Box com a sua TV DVD Blu ray player Decodificador Painel traseiro da TV Receptor de sat lite Set Top Cabo de udio n o fornecido O Cabo Component n o fornecido 1 Conecte um cabo Componente entre as entradas COMPONENT IN 1 ou 2 Y
275. ra a exibi o otimizada em um ambiente normal Natural Seleciona a exibi o de imagem tima com conforto visual Filme Seleciona a imagem para a exibi o de filmes em uma sala escura Q Luz de Fundo Contraste Brilho Nitidez Matiz Vd Vm ATV tem diversas op es de defini es que permitem controlar a qualidade da imagem e Luz de Fundo Ajusta o brilho da luz de fundo do LCD Contraste Ajusta o n vel de contraste da imagem Brilho Ajusta o n vel de brilho da imagem Nitidez Ajusta a defini o da borda da imagem Cor Ajusta a satura o de cor da imagem Matiz Vd Vm Ajusta a matiz da cor da imagem M 0 oo forma correspondente As defini es podem ser ajustadas separadamente para cada entrada da TV ir reduzir o custo geral de funcionamento Q Configura es Avan adas Anova TV Samsung permite que voc crie muito mais defini es de imagem do que os modelos anteriores Advanced Settings dispon veis no modo Standard ou Filme No modo PC poss vel fazer altera es apenas em Contraste Din mico Gamma e Estabilidade de Branco nos itens de Configura es Avan adas Tom de preto Desligado Escuro Mais escuro Muito escuro Voc pode selecionar o n vel de preto para ajustar a profundidade da tela Contraste Din mico Desligado Baixo M dio Alto Voc pode ajustar o contraste da tela para obter um excelente contraste Gama Voc pode ajustar a intensidad
276. re o de travamento 0 2 Conecte o cabo da trava Kensington O 3 Prenda a trava Kensington a uma mesa ou a um objeto fixo pesado n Fixando a TV Parede Cuidado Puxar empurrar ou subir na TV pode fazer com que ela caia Fique atento para que as crian as n o N subam ou mexam na TV pois se elas fizerem isso a TV poder cair e causar ferimentos graves podendo at levar morte Siga todas as precau es de seguran a fornecidas no folheto de seguran a incluso Para maior estabilidade instale um dispositivo anti queda para fins de seguran a da forma a seguir Para evitar que a TV caia 1 Coloque os parafusos em grampos e prenda os bem na parede Certifique se de que os parafusos estejam fixados firmemente na parede Voc pode precisar de material extra como um chumbador dependendo do tipo de parede D Como os grampos parafusos e corda necess rios n o s o fornecidos voc deve amp 7 compr los separadamente E Parede 2 Remova os parafusos da parte traseira central da TV coloque os em grampos e aperte os novamente na TV Os parafusos podem n o ser fornecidos com o produto Neste caso adquira parafusos com as especifica es a seguir Especifica es de parafuso Para uma TV LCD de 17 a 29 polegadas M4 X 15 Para uma TV LCD de 32 a 40 polegadas M6 X 15 3 Conecte os grampos fixados na TV e os que est o fixados na parede com um fio forte e prenda o
277. re receiving is High Definition HD HD channels sometimes broadcast Standard Definition SD programming which can cause black bars Set your cable satellite box to stretch or widescreen mode to eliminate the bars Picture has a Red Green or Pink tint Make sure the Component cables are connected to the correct jacks Closed Captioning not working If you are using a Cable Satellite box you must set Closed Captioning on the box not your TV Snowy picture Your cable box may need a firmware upgrade Please contact your Cable company Ghosting on picture This is sometimes caused by compatibility issues with your cable box Try connecting Component cables instead Horizontal bars appear to flicker jitter or shimmer on the image Vertical bars appear to flicker jitter or shimmer on the image Adjust the Coarse tuning and then adjust the Fine tuning Adjust the Coarse tuning and then adjust the Fine tuning Screen is black and power indicator light blinks steadily On your computer check Power Signal Cable The TV is using its power management system Move the computer s mouse or press any key on the keyboard Image is not stable and may appear to vibrate when you have a computer connected to the PC input If the setting is not correct use your computer utility program to change the display settings Your TV supports multiscan display functions within the following frequency domain
278. rminado canal A exibi o ser atualizada de forma din mica medida que novas informa es forem disponibilizadas Tamb m poss vel exibir o menu do guia simplesmente pressionando o bot o GUIDE Para configurar o Guia Padr o consulte as descri es Guia Completo Exibe as informa es da programa o como segmentos sequenciais de Uma hora S o exibidas duas horas de informa es sobre a programa o mas os hor rios anteriores e posteriores podem ser pesquisados Mini Guia As informa es de cada programa s o exibidas em cada linha da tela do Mini guia do canal atual a partir do programa atual de acordo com a ordem de in cio dos programas Q Guia Padr o Mini Guia Guia Completo poss vel decidir se deseja exibir o Mini Guide ou o Guia Completo quando o bot o GUIDE do controle remoto for pressionado Lista de Canais Para procedimentos detalhados sobre a utiliza o da Lista de Canais consulte as instru es de Gerenciamento de canais consulte a p gina 17 18 Voc pode selecionar essas op es pressionando o bot o CH LIST no controle remoto O Sintonia Fina apenas canais anal gicos Utilize a Sintonia Fina para ajustar manualmente um canal particular para uma tima recep o Se voc n o armazenar na mem ria o canal com a Sintonia Fina ajustada as altera es n o ser o salvas aparecer junto ao nome dos canais com Sintonia Fina Para restaurar a configura o de Si
279. rminals the position of the port and the type of the external device may differ depending on the manufacturer If the IP address allocation by the DHCP server has failed turn the external modem off turn it on again after at least 10 seconds and then try again For the connections between the external modem and the Sharer Router refer to the owner s manual of the corresponding product You can connect the TV to the LAN directly without connecting it through a Sharer Router You cannot use a manual connection type ADSL modem because it does not support DHCP You have to use an automatic connection type ADSL modem Ss e S amp S English 31 LAN Connection for Static IP Environment The procedures to set up the network using a static IP address are described below You have to manually enter the IP address subnet mask gateway and DNS that are provided by your Internet Service Provider ISP 1 Connect the LAN port on the rear panel of the TV and the LAN port on the wall using the LAN cable The LAN Port on the Wall TV Rear Panel LAN Cable You can connect the LAN via a Sharer Router The LAN Port on the Wall TV Rear Panel IP Sharer LAN Cable LAN Cable The terminals the position of the port and the type of the external device may differ depending on the manufacturer If you are using a static IP address your ISP will inform you of the IP address subnet mask gateway and D
280. rovider requires an ID or password to connect to the Internet network your TV may not be able to connect to the Internet In this case you have to enter your ID or password when connecting to the Internet using an Internet Sharer Router The internet connection may fail due to a firewall problem In this case contact your Internet service provider If you cannot connect to the Internet even if you have followed the procedures of your Internet service provider please contact Samsung Electronics This TFT LCD panel uses a panel consisting of sub pixels 6 220 800 which require sophisticated technology to produce However there may be few bright or dark pixels on the screen These pixels will have no impact on the performance of the product English 79 E Installing the Stand Preset Place the Guide Stand and Cover Neck onto the stand and fasten it using the screws Applicable to 32inch models only 1 Attach your LCD TV to the stand Two or more people should carry the TV Make sure to distinguish between the front and back of the stand when assembling them To make sure the TV is installed on the stand at a proper level do not apply excess downward pressure to the upper left of right sides of the TV 2 Fasten screws at position and then fasten screws at position 7 Stand the product up and fasten the screws If you fasten the screws with the LCD TV placed down it may lean to one side Disconnecti
281. rs Select your favorite color space to experience the most natural color e Auto Auto Color Space automatically adjusts to the most natural color tone based on program sources e Native Native Color Space offers deep and rich color tone e Custom Adjusts the color range to suit your preference English 19 Changing the adjustment value will refresh the adjusted screen Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have connected to an input of the TV For example if you have a DVD player connected to HDMI 1 and it is currently selected settings and adjustments will be saved for the DVD player Color Red Green Blue Yellow Cyan or Magenta Color is available when Color Space is set to Custom In Color you can adjust the RGB values for the selected color To reset the adjusted RGB value select Reset Red Adjusts the red saturation level of the selected color Green Adjusts the green saturation level of the selected color Blue Adjusts the blue saturation level of the selected color Reset Resets the color space to the default values SSE White Balance You can adjust the color temperature for more natural picture colors R Offset Adjusts the red color darkness G Offset Adjusts the green color darkness B Offset Adjusts the blue color darkness R Gain Adjusts the red color brightness G Gain Adjusts the green color brightness B Gain Adjusts the blue color brightness Reset Th
282. rtados dependendo do pa s Altera a senha do bloqueio de servi o O n mero padr o da senha de uma TV nova 0 0 0 0 Se voc esquecer a senha pressione os bot es do controle remoto na sequ ncia a seguir para redefinir a senha para 0 0 0 0 POWER desligado MUTE gt 8 gt 2 gt 4 POWER ligado Dura o do servi o Selecione para configurar o tempo de dura o do servi o antes da exibi o do protetor de tela Ticker Autorun gt Off On Selecione para definir que o rel gio seja executado automaticamente ou n o ao ligar a TV Dura o do rel gio Selecione para configurar o tempo de dura o do servi o antes da exibi o do protetor de tela QO Propriedades Exibe informa es do Internet TV Voc pode medir a velocidade do servi o Internet TV usando Measuring the speed of the Internet TV service a Utiliza o do servi o Internet TV Em um widget que proporcione menus m ltiplos de categoria voc pode visualizar os conte dos dos menus de categoria usando os bot es de gt Login de conta 1 Pressione o bot o vermelho 2 selecione a User account desejada e em seguida pressione o bot o ENTER L 3 Insira a senha Quando o login acontecer a conta de usu rio ser exibida na tela Antes de fazer o login pelos menos uma conta ou mais deve estar registrada Se deseja criar uma conta consulte Configura o do Internet TV Utiliza o da galeria de widgets Voc pode usar Run S
283. run modify and propagate that work subject to this License You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License An entity transaction is a transaction transferring control of an organization or substantially all assets of one or subdividing an organization or merging organizations If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party s predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License For example you may not impose a license fee royalty or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License and you may not initiate litigation including a cross claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making using selling offering for sale or importing the Program or any portion of it 11 12 13 14 Patents A contributor is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based The work thus licensed is called the contributor s contributor version A co
284. s bem ad Instale a TV perto da parede para que ela nao caia para tras E seguro conectar a corda para que os grampos fixados na parede fiquem no mesmo nivel ou abaixo dos grampos fixados na TV Desamarre a corda antes de mover a TV 4 Verifique se todas as conex es est o seguras Verifique periodicamente as conex es para evitar qualquer sinal de fadiga ou falha Caso haja alguma d vida sobre a seguran a das conex es entre em contato com um profissional de instala o Parede Portugu s 80 E Especifica es Nome do modelo LN40B650 LN46B650 LN55B650 Tamanho da tela Diagonal 40 polegadas 46 polegadas 55 polegadas Resolu o do PC 1920 x 1080 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 60 Hz Som Sa da 10W x 2 10W x 2 15W x2 Dimens es LxAxP Sem suporte 39 2 x 3 1 x 25 6 44 3 x 3 1 x 28 8 51 6 x 3 1 x 33 1 995 1 x 78 6 x 650 4 mm 1126 1 x 78 6 x 730 3 mm 1310 8 x 79 9 x 841 8 mm Com suporte 39 2 x 10 0 x 27 8 44 3 x 10 9 x 30 8 51 6 x 12 0 x 35 2 995 1 x 255 0 x 705 9 mm 1126 1 x 277 0 x 783 4 mm 1310 8 x 305 0 x 894 8mm Peso Sem suporte 14 8 kg 32 6 Ibs 19 4 kg 42 8 Ibs 29 4 kg 64 8 Ibs Com suporte 18 7 kg 41 2 lbs 24 4 kg 53 8 Ibs 34 7 kg 76 5 Ibs Considera es ambientais Temperatura de opera o Umidade em opera o Temperatura de armazenamento Umidade em armazenamento 50 F
285. s de permiss es de acesso Al m disso o servidor do PC e a TV devem estar na mesma sub rede e M todo Selecione o menu Share e selecione Set Device Policy Os itens rejeitados s o representados em cinza Voc pode alterar as permiss es de acesso atrav s do bot o Permitir Accept Recusar Para excluir um item selecione o item e selecione Delete Item Q Servidor Servidor Voc pode executar ou interromper o uso do PC como um servidor Executar o DLNA Digital Media Server quando o Windows inicia Voc pode determinar se o servidor do PC deve ser iniciado automaticamente quando o Windows for iniciado Modificar o nome do servidor poss vel renomear o servidor do PC Insira um novo nome e clique em OK O novo nome ser exibido no canto superior direito da janela e ser exibido na TV WU Ajuda Vers o exibida a caixa de mensagem de informa es de vers o do programa E Uso do menu DLNA DLNA Digital Living Network Alliance permite a reprodu o do conte do salvo em um servidor DLNA normalmente o PC conectado TV ou a uma rede O Media Play permite a reprodu o de arquivos salvos em um dispositivo de mem ria USB conectado TV enquanto o DLNA permite a reprodu o de arquivos salvos em um servidor DLNA seu PC conectado TV ou em rede Os procedimentos para usar o conte do s o os mesmos que para o Media Play USB amp DLNA Se voc instalar o PC share manager fornecido com a TV em um PC voc pode f
286. s paragraph plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License For example you may not impose a license fee royalty or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License and you may not initiate litigation including a cross claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making using selling offering for sale or importing the Program or any portion of it Patents A contributor is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based The work thus licensed is called the contributor s contributor version A contributor s essential patent claims are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor whether already acquired or hereafter acquired that would be infringed by some manner permitted by this License of making using or selling its contributor version but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version For purposes of this definition control includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License Each contributor grants you a non exclusive worldwide
287. s the TV mode directly PRE CH Enables you to return to the previous channel you were watching 6 V CHA Press to change channels DB SOURCE Press to display and select the available video sources FAV CH Press to switch to your favorite channels MENU Displays the main on screen menu RETURN Returns to the previous menu UP A DOWNV LEFT lt RIGHTD ENTERLS Use to select on screen menu items and change menu values EXIT Press to exit the menu P SIZE Picture size selection CONTENT This function enables you to view the Content Library CC Controls the caption decoder 5 GUIDE Electronic Programme Guide EPG display English 5 SAMSUNG Installing Batteries in the Remote Control 1 Lift the cover at the back of the remote control upward as shown in the figure 2 Install two AAA size batteries ie Make sure to match the and ends of the batteries with the diagram inside the 1 compartment 6020 P 3 Replace the cover Remove the batteries and store them in a cool dry place if you won t be using the remote control for a long time Assuming typical TV usage the batteries should last for about one year Ifthe remote control doesn t work check the following e ls the TV power on Are the plus and minus ends of the batteries reversed Are the batteries drained Is there a power outage or is the power c
288. se o cabo de sinal est bem conectado ao computador Verifique a resolu o m xima e a frequ ncia de v deo do dispositivo conectado Compare estes valores com os dados dos modos de visualiza o Problema na tela de transmiss o digital Verifique a intensidade do sinal digital e a antena de entrada A imagem est muito clara ou muito escura Ajuste o brilho e o contraste Ajuste a sintonia fina Barras pretas na tela Certifique se de que a transmiss o recebida seja de alta defini o HD Os canais HD s vezes transmitem a programa o de defini o padr o SD o que pode causar barras pretas Configure o cabo receptor de sat lite para o modo de extens o ou widescreen para eliminar as barras A imagem apresenta um matiz vermelho verde ou rosa Certifique de que os cabos do componente estejam conectados aos conectores corretos O recurso Closed Captioning legenda oculta n o est funcionando Se voc usar um cabo receptor de sat lite necess rio configurar o Closed Captioning no receptor n o na TV Imagem com chuvisco O cabo necessita de um upgrade de firmware Por favor entre em contato com a empresa de servi os a cabo Fantasma na imagem Este problema causado por quest es de compatibilidade com o cabo Em vez disso tente conectar cabos do componente Barras horizontais parecem tremer piscar ou distorcer a imagem Barras verticais parecem tremer
289. sejado Em seguida pressione o bot o amarelo Repita a opera o acima para selecionar diversos arquivos de filme Amarca Y aparece no arquivo de filme selecionado 5 Pressione o bot o TOOLS O menu de op o muda de acordo com o status atual Prefer ncia Q Reproduzir o grupo atual Usando este menu voc s pode reproduzir arquivos de filme do grupo de classifica o que estiver selecionado Q Copiar Copiar grupo atual Cop arq sel Quando diversos arquivos est o selecionados Selecione o filme para copiar Ou selecione v rios arquivos pressionando o bot o amarelo Pressione o bot o TOOLS para selecionar Copiar ou Copiar grupo atual Cop arq sel Os arquivos no dispositivo USB s o salvos na mem ria da TV Voc s pode copiar os arquivos salvos no dispositivo USB Quando a mem ria da TV est cheia arquivos n o podem ser copiados O Excluir Excluir tudo Apagar arq selecionado Quando v rios arquivos est o selecionados Selecione o arquivo para excluir Ou selecione v rios arquivos pressionando o bot o amarelo Pressione o bot o TOOLS para selecionar Excluir ou Excluir tudo Apagar arq selecionado Os arquivos s o exclu dos Voc s pode excluir arquivos salvos na mem ria da TV N o poss vel recuperar um arquivo exclu do Q Deselect All Quando pelo menos um arquivo estiver selecionado Voc pode cancelar a sele o de todos os arquivos A marca v indicando que o arquivo c
290. signal the TV will send out 5 1 channel sound to the Home theater receiver When the source is a digital component such as a DVD Blu ray player Cable Box Satellite receiver Set Top Box and is connected to the TV via HDMI only 2 channel sound will be heard from the Home Theater receiver If you want to hear 5 1 channel audio connect the digital audio out jack on DVD Blu ray player Cable Box Satellite receiver Set Top Box directly to an Amplifier or Home Theater not the TV English 10 a Connecting an Amplifier DVD Home Theater Amplifier DVD Home Theater TV Rear Panel Audio Cable Not supplied 1 Connect Audio Cables between the AUDIO OUT R AUDIO L jacks on the TV and Audio Input jacks on the Amplifier DVD Home Theater When an audio amplifier is connected to the AUDIO OUT R AUDIO L jacks Decrease the volume of the TV and adjust the volume level with the Amplifier s volume control Each Amplifier DVD Home Theater has a different back panel configuration When connecting an Amplifier DVD Home Theater match the color of the connection terminal to the cable English 11 Connecting a PC Using the D Sub Cable TV Rear Panel PC D Sub Cable Not supplied PC Audio Cable Not supplied 1 Connect a D Sub Cable between PC IN PC connector on the TV and the PC output connector on your computer
291. sione RETORNAR e Estando no modo normal de not cias ao pressionar os bot es lt e gt troca se para previs o do tempo do Ticker Ao apertar o bot o vermelho a tela de op es permite configurar o Ticker e Servi o Possibilita a escolha do tipo do Ticker Tempo ou Not cias Se estiver em Tempo podemos tamb m selecionar as Cidades Favoritas e Posi o Determina se o Ticker fica acima ou abaixo da tela e Transpar ncia Muda a raz o que o Ticker est transparente em rela o imagem Mover 4 gt Ajustar Retornar de fundo Obs Os widgets Ticker e Previs o do Tempo compartilham a lista de Cidades Favoritas Portugu s 72 CENTRO DE REDE DOM STICA E Centro de Rede Dom stica Sobre o Centro de Rede Dom stica O Centro de Rede Dom stica conecta aparelhos de TV e telefones celulares atrav s de uma rede poss vel visualizar chegadas de chamadas conte dos de mensagens de texto e compromissos agendados no celular atrav s da TV ao utilizar o Cent Rede Dom stica Al m disso poss vel reproduzir conte dos de m dia salvos em celulares como v deos fotos e m sicas controlando os para irem para a TV atrav s da rede Caso o dispositivo ofere a suporte fun o DLNA DMC Digital Media Controller a fun o Centro de rede dom stica estar dispon vel O celular Samsung SCH i910 oferece suporte ao Centro de Rede Dom stica Outros modelos ser o adicionados futuramente O dispositivo m
292. sitivo Anynet correspondente utilizando um cabo HDMI Conecte o cabo ptico entre o conector DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL da sua TV e o conector Digital Audio Input do home theater Seguindo a conex o acima a entrada ptico somente reproduz udio de 2 canais Voc ouvir somente som dos alto falantes direito e esquerdo dianteiros do home theater e do subwoofer Caso deseje ouvir udio de 5 1 canais ligue o conector DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL do aparelho de DVD ou caixa de transmiss o de TV a cabo via sat lite ou seja dispositivo Anynet 1 ou 2 diretamente ao amplificador ou home theater e n o TV Conecte apenas um home theater Voc pode conectar um dispositivo Anynet usando o cabo HDMI 1 3 Alguns cabos HDMI n o suportam as fun es do Anynet O Anynett funciona quando o dispositivo AV com suporte ao Anynet est no modo standby ou ligado O Anynett suporta um total de 12 dispositivos de udio v deo Note que voc pode conectar at 3 dispositivos iguais 5 5 ts S Portugu s 61 E Configurando o Anynet A Pressione o bot o TOOLS para exibir o menu Aplicativos Tamb m poss vel exibir o menu Anynet selecionando Aplicativos Anynet HDMI CEC Media Play USB e DLNA Anynet HDMI CEC x Biblioteca de conte do Internet TV Centro de rede dom stica songeady Q Configura o Anynet HDMI CEC Desligado Ligado Para usar a fun o Anynet Anynet HDMI CEC dev
293. sitivos Anynett O que Anynet Anynet uma fun o que permite o controle de todos os dispositivos Samsung conectados que suportam Anynet com o controle remoto da TV Samsung O sistema Anynet pode ser usado apenas com os dispositivos da Samsung com a fun o Anynet Para certificar se de que o dispositivo Samsung possui este recurso verifique se ele possui o logotipo Anynet Para conectar TV Anynet Dispositivo 1 Anynet Dispositivo 2 Anynet Dispositivo3 Anynet Dispositivo 4 CE CE HOMIOUT o Cabo HDMI 1 3 Cabo HDMI 1 3 Cabo HDMI 1 3 Cabo HDMI 1 3 1 Conecte o conector HDMI IN 1 2 3 DVI IN ou 4 da TV e o conector HDMI OUT do dispositivo Anynet correspondente utilizando um cabo HDMI Para conectar ao home theater IRENE ISS RE RSS REPRISE RE EEE PERA ERR Home Theater Anynet Dispositivo 1 oO DiGTAL ADIN HOMIOUT HOMIIN HOM OUT F E E Cabo HDMI 1 3 Cabo ptico abo Anynet Dispositivo 2 Anynet Dispositivo 3 Anynet Dispositivo 4 a ha P Cabo HDMI 1 3 Cabo HDMI 1 3 Cabo HDMI 1 3 1 Conecte o conector HDMI IN 1 2 3 DVI IN ou 4 da TV e o conector HDMI OUT do dispositivo Anynet correspondente utilizando um cabo HDMI Conecte o HDMI IN do home theater e o HDMI OUT do dispo
294. sive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee 5 Conveying Modified Source Versions You may convey a work based on the Program or the modifications to produce it from the Program in the form of source code under the terms of section 4 provided that you also meet all of these conditions a The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it and giving a relevant date b The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7 This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to keep intact all notices Cc You must license the entire work as a whole under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy This License will therefore apply along with any applicable section 7 additional terms to the whole of the work and all its parts regardless of how they are packaged This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it d If the work has interactive user interfaces each must display Appropriate Legal Notices however if the Program has interactive interfaces that
295. spositivos Anynett poss vel conectar um dispositivo Anynet utilizando somente o cabo HDMI 1 3 Alguns cabos HDMI n o suportam as fun es do Anynett e Se for finalizada devido a uma situa o anormal como por exemplo desconex o do cabo HDMI ou cabo de for a ou falha de energia repita a varredura do dispositivo N o poss vel gravar o e Verifique se a tomada da antena no dispositivo de grava o est devidamente programa de TV conectada O som da TV n o sai pelo e Conecte o cabo ptico entre a TV e o receiver receiver Portugu s 64 CONTENT LIBRARY E Utiliza o da Content Library A Biblioteca de conte do permite que voc assista a uma diversa gama de conte do da sua Media Play USB e DLNA Anynet HDMI CEC TV poss vel utilizar o conte do padr o armazenado na mem ria da TV ou conte do novo utilizando um dispositivo USB ou a Internet Content Library songpady Internet TV Centro de Rede dom stica Utiliza o do menu Content Library 1 Pressione o bot o MENU Pressione o bot o A ou Y para selecionar Aplicativos e em seguida pressione ENTER Ls 2 Pressione o bot o A ou Y para selecionar Content Library e em seguida pressione ENTERLS O menu principal de Content Library exibido Galeria 3 Pressione o bot o lt ou gt para selecionar um icone Galeria Culinaria Jogos Ingl s para crian as Bem estar Outros Gerenciamento de conte do e ent o pressione o b
296. ss vel modificar as informa es de clima de arquivos de m sica As informa es de grupo do arquivo atual s o atualizadas e o arquivo movido para o novo grupo Para mudar a informa o de v rios arquivos selecione os arquivos desejados pressionando o bot o amarelo O Desmarcar Tudo Quando pelo menos um arquivo estiver selecionado Voc pode cancelar a sele o de todos os arquivos A marca v indicando que o arquivo correspondente est selecionado fica oculta Q Informa es As informa es do arquivo de m sica incluindo nome tamanho resolu o data de modifica o e o caminho s o exibidas Voc pode visualizar as informa es do arquivo de m sica durante Repr grupo atual usando os mesmos procedimentos Pressione o bot o INFO para visualizar as informa es CONTENT Q Remover com seguran a Cro sine Voc pode remover o dispositivo com seguran a da TV Portugu s 48 a Reprodugao de musica Reprodugao de um arquivo de musica 1 Pressione o bot o Y para selecionar a se o de lista de arquivos 2 00 00 04 00 04 04 7 3 37 2 Pressione o bot o lt ou gt para selecionar um arquivo de m sica a ser 4 Hove You gt HaHa reproduzido 3 Pressione o bot o gt Reproduzir ENTER Ls Este menu apresenta somente arquivos com extens o de arquivo MP3 Arquivos com outras extens es de arquivo n o s o exibidos mesmo que sejam salvos no mesmo dispositivo USB O arquivo selecionado
297. ssui uma configura o diferente para o painel traseiro Ao conectar um amplificador DVD home theater use um terminal de conex o da mesma cor do cabo Portugu s 11 Conectar um computador Usando o Cabo D Sub Painel traseiro da TV PC O Cabo D Sub n o fornecido Cabo de udio de PC n o fornecido 1 Conecte um cabo D Sub entre o conector PC IN PC da TV e o conector de sa da PC no seu computador 2 Conecte um cabo de udio de PC entre a entrada PC IN AUDIO da TV e a sa da Audio Out da placa de som do seu computador Caso seu PC seja compat vel com conex es HDMI poss vel ligar esse conector ao terminal HDMI IN 1 2 3 DVI IN ou 4 Caso o seu PC seja compat vel com uma conex o DVI poss vel ligar esse conector ao terminal HDMI IN3 DVI IN Usando o cabo HDMI DVI Painel traseiro da TV PC Cabo mini plug Stereo 2RCA de 3 5 mm n o fornecido o O Cabo HDMI DVI nao fornecido Conecte um cabo HDMI DVI entre a entrada HDMI IN3 DVI IN na TV e a sa da PC no seu computador 2 Conecte um cabo mini plug Stereo 2RCA de 3 5 mm entre a entrada DVI IN AUDIO da TV e a saida Audio Out da placa de som do seu computador Ao usar uma conex o a cabo HDMI DVI voc deve usar o terminal HDMI IN3 DVI IN Uso do cabo HDMI Painel lateral da TV Painel traseiro da TV
298. star a antena para melhorar a recep o dos canais digitais dispon veis Se o medidor da intensidade do sinal indicar que o sinal est fraco ajuste fisicamente a antena para aumentar a intensidade do sinal Continue a ajustar a antena at encontrar a melhor posi o com o sinal mais forte Painel lateral da TV fl He ll ll mH Dispositivo USB Tas Q Atualiza o de Software A Samsung pode oferecer atualiza es para o firmware da sua TV no futuro As atualiza es podem ser realizadas atrav s da TV quando a mesma estiver conectada Internet ou fazendo o download de novos firmwares no site samsung com e gravando os em um dispositivo de mem ria USB Vers o Atual o software j instalado na TV Software Alternativo Backup mostra a vers o anterior que ser substitu da O software representado como Ano M s Dia Version Quanto mais recente a data Umas gt toa T ch Sra Atualiza o de Software mais nova a vers o do software Recomendamos sempre a instala o da vers o mais w recente Software Alternativo Por USB Insira na TV um dispositivo USB com a atualiza o do firmware cujo download foi feito do site samsung com Tome cuidado para n o desconectar a energia ou remover a unidade USB enquanto as atualiza es s o aplicadas A TV desligar e ligar automaticamente ap s concluir a atualiza o do firmware Verifique a vers o do f
299. sting signal the Analog Caption function may operate on digital channels English 27 O Child Lock gt Off On This feature allows you to prevent unauthorized users such as children from watching unsuitable programme by muting out video and audio Before the setup screen appears the PIN number input screen appears Enter your 4 digit PIN number The default PIN number of a new TV set is 0 0 0 0 You can change the PIN by selecting Change PIN from the menu You can lock some channels in Channel List refer to page 18 Child Lock is available only in TV mode Q Change PIN You can change your personal ID number that is required to set up the TV Before the setup screen appears the PIN number input screen appears Enter your 4 digit PIN number The default PIN number of a new TV set is 0 0 0 0 If you forget the PIN code press the remote control buttons in the following sequence which resets the PIN to 0 0 0 0 POWER Off MUTE 8 2 4 POWER On Q Parental Lock This feature allows you to prevent unauthorized users such as children from watching unsuitable programme by a 4 digit PIN Personal Identification Number code that is defined by the user Before the setup screen appears the PIN number input screen appears Enter your 4 digit PIN number The default PIN number of a new TV set is 0 0 0 0 You can change the PIN by selecting Change PIN from the menu When the parental ratings are set the f
300. t o TOOLS para usar o menu de op es 7 Os itens do menu de op es podem ser diferentes dependendo do status do canal Adicionar Apagar Voc pode adicionar ou excluir um canal para exibir somente os canais desejados Todos os canais exclu dos ser o exibidos no menu Todos os Canais Um canal acinzentado indica um canal exclu do O menu Adicionar exibido apenas para os canais exclu dos Tamb m poss vel excluir um canal do menu Canais Adicionados ou Favorito utilizando o mesmo procedimento Record HD Adicionar a Favoritos q gt 8 2 2 o S F om temporizador o nome do canal Selecionar todos SSSS Adicionar aos favoritos Excluir dos favoritos E possivel definir canais aos quais voc assiste com frequ ncia como Favoritos AJ Pressione o bot o TOOLS para exibir o menu Ferramentas Tamb m poss vel definir o acr scimo aos ou exclus o dos Favoritos selecionando Canal Lista de Canais Favorito Adicionar a Favoritos ou Excluir de Favoritos O s mbolo 4 ser exibido e o canal ser definido como um favorito Todos os canais favoritos ser o exibidos no menu Favorito Portugu s 17 Bloquear Desbloquear poss vel bloquear um canal para que n o seja poss vel selecionar e visualizar o canal Pressione o bot o TOOLS para exibir o menu Ferramentas Voc tamb m pode configurar os canais que est o bloqueados desbloqueados no momento selecionando Ferramentas
301. t Library gt EA E E S Using the Content Library Menu 1 Press the MENU button Press the A or Y button to select Application then press the ENTER 4 button 2 Press the A or Y button to select Content Library then press the ENTER L button The Content Library main menu is displayed 3 Press the lt or gt button to select an icon Gallery Cooking Game Children Wellness Gallery Others Content Management then press the ENTER Ls button Using the Remote Control Button in Content Library Menu Button Operations AIV lt 4 gt Move the cursor and select an item ENTERLS Select the currently selected item RETURN Return to the previous menu EXIT Stop the current function and return to the Content Library main menu V CHA Stop Content Library mode and Returns to TV mode Color button Keys that provide functions are described on the corresponding page VOL MUTE You can control the volume of the played content CONTENTS LIBRARY CONTAINS TEXT GRAPHICS IMAGES MULTIMEDIA AND OTHER MATERIALS FOR INFORMATIONAL AND PROMOTIONAL PURPOSES ONLY MATERIALS IN CONTENTS LIBRARY HAS BEEN MODIFIED AND KEEPS BEING REVISED AND UPDATED THE MATERIALS IN THE CONTENTS LIBRARY MAY NOT BE SUITABLE FOR ALL AUDIENCES INFORMATION IN THE CONTENTS LIBRARY IS PROVIDED AS IS ALTHOUGH THE INFORMATION PROVIDED TO YOU IN THE CONTENTS LIBRARY IS OBTAINED OR COMPLIED FROM SOURCES WE B
302. t code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d A separable portion of the object code whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library need not be included in conveying the object code work A User Product is either 1 a consumer product which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal family or household purposes or 2 anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling In determining whether a product is a consumer product doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage For a particular product received by a particular user normally used refers to a typical or common use of that class of product regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses or expects or is expected to use the product A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial industrial or non consumer uses unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product Installation Information for a User Product means any methods procedures authorization keys or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the mod
303. ta de servidor de PC selecionada Clique para cancelar o compartilhamento Clique para atualizar a pasta do PC e seus arquivos Clique para sincronizar o status de compartilhamento As pastas e os arquivos que ser o compartilhados do PC s o relacionados A OD oor PS oN gt As pastas compartilhadas pelo usuario sao relacionadas O Arquivo Propriedade Exibe informa es sobre o arquivo ou a pasta selecionada e M todo 1 Selecione um arquivo ou pasta e selecione o menu File e em seguida o submenu Property e M todo 2 Selecione um arquivo ou uma pasta clique com o bot o direito sobre ele e selecione Property no menu pop up lt M todo 1 gt lt M todo 2 gt E sato sima TE Samun P Stare Norge C Fle Sme See Help aa Meda Phy rose gaoa ava Meda Phy rose Fabra Property ems te e tate I res o o o o Ok atna Sair Encerra o aplicativo DLNA Se voc selecionar Exit sem aplicar as altera es ap s modificar o status compartilhado uma mensagem ser exibida perguntando se voc deseja aplicar as configura es alteradas ao PC Selecione Yes para aplicar as altera es e sair do aplicativo E SAMSUNG FC sesta a eee ZE Ole Seer Medha Pay FESE 7 Portugu s 58 O Compartilhar Como compartilhar uma Pasta poss vel compartilhar uma pasta do seu PC com a TV O n mero m ximo de pastas que podem ser compartilhadas 32 S
304. te Dependendo da esta o e do sinal da transmissora a hora autom tica pode n o ser ajustada corretamente Se isso ocorrer ajuste a hora manualmente A antena ou cabo deve estar conectado para que seja poss vel ajustar a hora automaticamente Mover Entrar O Retornar S E Defini o do Rel gio O hor rio pode ser configurado manualmente Esta fun o disponibilizada quando o Modo Rel gio definido como Manual poss vel ajustar diretamente m s dia ano hora e minuto pressionando as teclas num ricas do controle remoto Fuso Hor rio Selecione o seu fuso hor rio Esta fun o disponibilizada quando o Modo Rel gio definido como Auto Q Sleep Timer O sleep timer desliga automaticamente a TV depois de um tempo predefinido de 30 60 90 120 150 e 180 minutos A Pressione o bot o TOOLS para exibir o menu Ferramentas Tamb m poss vel definir o sleep timer selecionando Configura o Sleep Timer ETTA Para cancelar a fun o Sleep Timer selecione Desligado ats O Temporizador 1 Temporizador 2 Temporizador 3 o Volume Entrada Tr s diferentes configura es de temporizadores podem ser realizadas preciso ajustar o ET rel gio primeiro Repetir Umavez Hor rio de Ligar Defina hora minuto am pm e Ativado Desativado Para ativar o temporizador com a configura o correspondente configure para Ativado 4 Mover Ajustar 3 Entrar 5 Retornar Hor ri
305. the TV Connect only one Home Theater You can connect an Anynet device using the HDMI 1 3 cable Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet functions Anynet works when the AV device supporting Anynet is in the Standby or On status Anynet supports up to 12 AV devices in total Note that you can connect up to 3 devices of the same type English 62 H Setting Up Anynett AJ Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu You can also display Anynet menu i by selecting Tools Anynett HDMI CEC Media Play USB amp DLNA Anynet HDMI CEC Q Setup Anynet HDMI CEC Off On To use the Anynet Function Anynett HDMI CEC must be set to On Content Library Internet TV Home Network Center When the Anynet HDMI CEC function is disabled all the Anynet related operations Arynet are deactivated Auto Turn Off No Yes Setting an Anynet Device to turn Off automatically when the TV is turned Off Anynet HDMI CEC Auto Turn Off The active source on the TV remote must be set to TV to use the Anynet function Ares dp If you set Auto Turn Off to Yes connected external devices are also turned off when the Anynet HDMI CEC TV is turned off If an external device is still recording it may or may not turn off Auto Turn Off E Switching between Anynet Devices a 1 Press the TOOLS button Press the ENTER button to select Anynet HDMI CEC 2 Press the A or Y button to select Device List th
306. the music volume press the volume button on the remote control To mute the sound press the MUTE button on the remote control If the sound is odd when playing MP3 files adjust the Equalizer and SRS TruSurround HD in the Sound menu An over modulated MP3 file may cause a sound problem The playing duration of a music file may be displayed as 00 00 00 if its playing time information is not found at the start of the file lt 44 REW or gt gt FF buttons do not function during play Sse 5 amp S amp D 5B Music Play Control Buttons Button Operations ENTER C Play Pause the music file gt Play the music file i Pause the music file E Exit play mode and return to the music list TOOLS Run various functions from the Music menus Music function information icon ay When all music files in the folder or the selected file are repeated Repeat Mode is On Q When all music files in the folder or the selected file are played once Repeat Mode is Off Playing the music group 1 2 3 4 Press the A button to move to the Sort key Section Press the lt or gt button to select a sorting standard Press the Y or ENTERL button to move to the Group List Section Press the gt Play button The files of the selected group will start playing Alternatively Select a sort key and then in the Fil
307. the screws may differ depending on their specifications Do not use screws tha t do not comply with the VESA standard screw specifications Do not fasten the screws too strongly this may damage the product or cause the product to fall leading to personal injury Samsung is not liable for these kinds of accidents Samsung is not liable for product damage or personal injury when a non VESA or non specified wall mount is used or the consumer fails to follow the product installation instructions Our 57 and 63 inch models do not comply with VESA Specifications Therefore you should use our dedicated wall mount kit for this model Do not exceed 15 degrees tilt when mounting this TV Ss B B BSS BSS8S A Do not install your Wall Mount Kit while your TV is turned on It may result in personal injury due to electric shock E Anti Theft Kensington Lock The Kensington Lock is a device used to physically fix the system when using it in a public place The appearance and locking method may differ from the illustration depending on the manufacturer Refer to the manual provided with the Kensington Lock for proper use The locking device has to be purchased separately The location of the Kensington Lock may be different depending on its model 1 Insert the locking device into the Kensington slot on the LCD TV and turn it in the locking direction 2 Connect the Kensington Lock cable 3 Fix the Kensington Lock to
308. tion is deactivated Screen Saver Run Time 2 hours 4 hours 8 hours Select to set the waiting time before the screen saver appears Information Select to viewing the information of the connected device Safe Remove You can remove the device safely from the TV English 56 MEDIA PLAY DLNA Setting the DLNA Network DLNA allows you to watch pictures musics and videos saved on your PC on your TV through a network connection in Media Play mode This removes the need to copy them to a USB storage device and then connect the device to your TV To use DLNA the TV must be connected to the network and the DLNA application must be installed on your PC Network Connection Diagram Cable External Modem ADSLIVDSL Cable TV Network Connection Diagram Wireless TV Side Panel TV K ont Samsung Wireless A a gt gt LAN Adapter 1 U L sg ll Gazi 1 Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter Wireless IP sharer LAN Cable For more information on how to configure your network refer to Setting the Network You are recommended to locate both TV and PC in same subnet The first 3 parts of the subnet address of the TV and the PC IP addresses should be the same and only the last part the host address should be cha
309. tista Humor G nero Pasta Prefer ncia Os arquivos de m sica s o classificados de acordo com o padr o de SUM B Dispositivo Classificar Selecionar 27 Ferramentas Retornar classifica o selecionado 5 Pressione o bot o Y para ir a se o de lista de arquivos Pressione o bot o ENTERLS para iniciar a reprodu o das m sicas na ordem selecionada pelo usu rio Para navegar para o grupo anterior pr ximo pressione o bot o lt 44 REW ou gt gt FF As informa es de m sica s o configuradas automaticamente A informa o de clima extra da de um arquivo de m sica pode diferir das expectativas do usu rio Voc pode mudar o clima e prefer ncias Caso n o existam informa es sobre um arquivo de m sica o nome do arquivo exibido 7 Caso n o existam informa es sobre o Artista lbum Ano ou G nero o item correspondente exibido em branco QO Visual Bas Mostra as pastas no dispositivo de mem ria USB Se voc seleciona uma pasta e pressiona o bot o ENTER L lt somente os arquivos de m sica contidos na pasta selecionada s o exibidos Quando classificados de acordo com Visual B s voc n o pode definir arquivos favoritos Q Titulo Classifica os t tulos de musica em s mbolo numero alfabeto ordem especial e mostra o arquivo de m sica O Artista Classifica o arquivo de m sica por artista em simbolo numero alfabeto ordem especial O Hum
310. tiver destacado O nome do programa aparece na parte superior do centro da tela Clique no bot o INFO para visualizar informa es detalhadas O n mero do canal tempo de execu o barra de status n vel de supervis o dos pais informa es de qualidade de v deo HD SD modos de som legenda ou teletexto idiomas da legenda ou teletexto e um breve resumo do programa destacado est o inclu dos nas informa es detalhadas aparecer se o resumo for longo Alternar entre Mini Guia e Guia Completo Pressione v rias vezes o bot o vermelho Em Guia completo Mova para tr s rapidamente 24 horas Pressione v rias vezes o bot o verde Mova para frente rapidamente 24 horas Pressione v rias vezes o bot o amarelo Em Mini guia Exibe a p gina anterior rapidamente Pressione o bot o verde Exibe a pr xima p gina rapidamente Pressione o Amarelo verde Portugu s 16 i Gerenciamento de Canais Utilize esse menu para adicionar excluir ou definir os canais favoritos e usar o guia de programa o no caso de transmiss o digital Todos os Canais Exibe todos os canais dispon veis no momento 04 1 SBTHD 05 1 TV GolboHD 07 1 Record HD Canais Adicionados Exibe todos os canais adicionados o S E ER gt a S S 3 a 2 Favorito Exibe todos os canais favoritos Para selecionar os canais favoritos definidos por voc pressione o bot o FAV CH no controle remoto Selecionar 47
311. tivo de mem ria USB Se voc seleciona uma pasta e pressiona o bot o ENTER L lt somente os arquivos de foto contidos na pasta selecionada s o exibidos Quando classificados de acordo com Visual B s voc n o pode definir arquivos favoritos Portugu s 42 Q Cronograma Classifica as fotos por data Classifica por ano e m s a partir da foto mais antiga O Cor gt vermelho amarelo verde azul magenta preto cinza sem classifica o Classifica as fotos por cor poss vel modificar as informa es de cores da foto Voc deve ajustar Usar visualiza o de cor para Ligado no menu Setup antes de classificar fotos por cor Pasta Classifica as fotos por pasta Se existirem muitas pastas no dispositivo USB os arquivos de fotos s o exibidos na ordem em cada pasta O arquivo de foto na pasta raiz exibido primeiro e os outros s o exibidos em ordem alfab tica por nome Q Prefer ncia wikkwlkKke Classifica as fotos por prefer ncia Favorito E possivel modificar as prefer ncias da foto Altera o das configura es de favoritos Selecione a foto desejada na lista de fotos em seguida pressione o bot o verde repetidamente at aparecer a configura o desejada At 3 estrelas podem ser selecionadas As estrelas s o somente para fins de agrupamento Por exemplo a configura o de 3 estrelas n o possui prioridade sobre a configura o de uma estrela E Menu de op o de lista de fotos
312. ton to return to the menu and choose a new letter dE RS och After you have finished selecting cities press the RETURN button and go back to the weekly and daily forecasts to check that the cities have been changed correctly English 72 E News Widget You can use your TV to see the latest News on various topics ade e Use the A and Y buttons to move between the different types of news and select Proe i the topic e Navigate using the A and Y buttons and press ENTER on the selected news item to read the full text Eiffel irita turistas Mover C Selecionar Retornar e Navigate using the A and Y buttons to read the complete news item Press RETURN to return to the previous menu m um triunfo A equipe classifica enfrenta o vencedor de Shakhtar e Olympique de Marselha Mover O Retornar E Widget Ticker The Ticker widget combines the News and Weather Forecast functions for various cities With this widget the normal TV programming remains on screen enabling users to continue watching their favourite programmes while benefiting from this additional TV facility e When you open Ticker the news headlines initially appear at the bottom of the screen Espores Relembre When you press ENTER the news item fills the entire screen e Pressing the lt and gt buttons changes the news item e To return to normal mode press RETURN e If you are in normal news mode pressing the lt and buttons switches to the T
313. ttings and try again If your Internet service provider has registered the MAC address of the device used to connect to the Internet for the first time and authenticates the MAC address each time you connect to the Internet your TV may not be able to connect to the Internet as the MAC address differs from that of the device PC In this case ask your Internet service provider about the procedures to connect devices other than your PC such as your TV to the Internet If you cannot connect to the Internet even if you have followed the procedures of your Internet service provider please contact a Samsung Electronics e Select a network Access Point You can select the IP sharer to use when using a wireless network 2 If a wireless Access Point is not in the Access Point list press the Red button 2 When the connection is made you will be returned to the screen automatically Wireless Network Setup If you have selected an Access Point with a security authentication Same 1 The Security Key input screen appears Enter the security key and press the Blue button on the remote control 2 If security encryption type is WEP 0 9 A F will be available when you input security key Move E Number 3 Enter Return Connecting WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup e f Security Key is already set In access point list select WPS Wireless Network Setup You can select PBC PIN Security Key SBE Move Enter O Return Connecting by using PBC S
314. ture Sharpness Adjusts the edge definition of the picture Color Adjusts color saturation of the picture Tint G R Adjusts the color tint of the picture When you make changes to Backlight Contrast Brightness Sharpness Color or Tint G R the OSD will be adjusted accordingly In PC mode you can only make changes to Backlight Contrast and Brightness Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have connected to an input of the TV The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the brightness level of the picture is lowered which will reduce the overall running cost fweerereee O Advanced Settings Samsung s new TVs allow you to make even more precise picture settings than previous Advanced Settings models Black Tone Of Advanced Settings is available in Standard or Movie mode a me Pe In PC mode you can only make changes to Dynamic Contrast Gamma and White Color Space Native White Balance Balance from among the Advanced Settings items Black Tone Off Dark Darker Darkest You can select the black level on the screen to adjust the screen depth Move CHEnter O Retun Flesh Tone Edge Enhancement On Dynamic Contrast Off Low Medium High You can adjust the screen contrast so that the optimal contrast is provided Gamma You can adjust the primary color red green blue intensity Color Space Color space is a color matrix composed of red green and blue colo
315. uando a tela de sele o Aplicativos aparecer pressione o bot o ENTER Ls para selecionar Media Play USB amp DLNA ou GM O MTP Protocolo de transfer ncia de m dia n o compat vel O sistema de arquivos suporta FAT16 FAT32 e NTFS Determinados tipos de c mera digital USB e dispositivos de udio podem n o ser compat veis com esta TV Media Play suporta apenas os dispositivos de classe de armazenamento em massa USB MSC MSC um dispositivo de armazenamento em massa Mass Storage Class Bulk Only Transport Exemplos de MSC s o microunidades thumb drives leitores de cart es Flash e USB HDD HUBs USB n o s o compat veis Z Por favor efetue a conex o diretamente porta USB da TV Se voc ea A D Y usar uma conex o a cabo separada pode ocorrer um problema de Ea compatibilidade com o USB Antes de conectar o dispositivo TV fa a back up de seus arquivos para evitar danos ou perda de dados A SAMSUNG n o respons vel por qualquer dano a arquivos de dados ou perda de dados Conecte um USB HDD porta dedicada USB1 HDD No entanto se o dispositivo conectado requer muita energia o USB1 HDD pode n o suportar o dispositivo N o desconecte o dispositivo USB ao carregar MSC suporta arquivos MP3 e JPEG enquanto que um dispositivo PTP suporta somente arquivos JPEG Quanto maior a resolu o maior o tempo para a exibi o na tela A resolu o m ximo de JPEG sup
316. uas antenas consulte Antenas VHF e UHF separadas Antenas com cabo condutor duplo horizontal de 300 Q 9 Se voc estiver utilizando uma antena externa por exemplo uma antena de telhado ou uma antena em V que tenha um cabo condutor duplo horizontal de 300 Q siga as instru es a seguir D 1 Coloque os fios do cabo condutor duplo sob os parafusos em um adaptador de 300 75 Q n o fornecido Utilize uma chave de fenda para apertar os parafusos ANT O AIR 7 2 Conecte o adaptador ao terminal ANT 1 IN AIR na parte traseira da TV ANT 1 IN AIR Antenas com cabo condutor redondo de 75 Q j Conecte o cabo da antena ao terminal ANT 1 IN AIR na parte traseira da TV Separar antenas VHF e UHF Idh Se houver duas antenas separadas para o televisor uma VHF e outra UHF preciso 000 k i combinar os dois sinais de antena antes de ligar as antenas ao televisor Este procedimento e VHF requer um adaptador opcional disponivel na maioria das lojas de eletr nica 1 Conecte os dois cabos da antena ao combinador 2 Conecte o combinador ao terminal ANT 1 IN AIR na parte traseira da TV Portugu s 6 Ligar a um sistema de televisao a cabo Para fazer a liga o a um sistema de televis o a cabo seguir as instru es abaixo Liga o a cabo sem utilizar um decodificador Conecte o cabo de entrada ao terminal ANT 2 IN CABLE na parte traseira da TV AT SUNO Com
317. umentar ou diminuir o volume O CH LIST Usado para exibir listas de canais na tela TOOLS Use esta op o para selecionar rapidamente as fun es usadas com mais freq ncia O INTERNET Pressione para usar v rios servi os de Internet para visualizar informa es teis e conte do de entretenimento O BOT ES COLORIDOS Utilize esses bot es nos menus Lista de Canais Internet TV Reprodu o de m dia etc MEDIA P Permite reproduzir arquivos de m sica fotos e filmes INFO Pressione para exibir informa es na tela da TV Use esses bot es nos modos DMA Media Play e Anynet 6 Este controle remoto pode ser usado para controlar a grava o nos gravadores Samsung que tenham o recurso Anynet TV Seleciona o modo de TV diretamente PRE CH Permite que voc retorne ao canal anterior que estava assistindo 6 V CH A Pressione para mudar os canais SOURCE Pressione para exibir e selecionar as fontes de v deo dispon veis FAV CH Pressione para alternar entre seus canais favoritos MENU Exibe o menu na tela principal 9 RETURN Volta ao menu anterior PARA CIMAA PARA BAIXO Y ESQUERDA lt DIREITA gt ENTER Ls Use para selecionar itens de menu na tela e alterar valores no menu EXIT Pressione para sair do menu P SIZE Sele o de tamanho da imagem CONTENT Esta fun o permite que voc visualize a
318. urce for all the software in the product that is covered by this License on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source or 2 access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge c Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially and only if you received the object code with such an offer in accord with subsection 6b d Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place gratis or for a charge and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code If the place to copy the object code is a network server the Corresponding Source may be on a different server operated by you or a third party that supports equivalent copying facilities provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements e Convey the object code using peer to peer transmission provided you inform other peers where the objec
319. urchasing this Samsung product To receive more complete service please register your product at ww samsung com register Model Serial No Q License SRS 0 TruSurround HD SRS and 6 Symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs Inc TruSurround HD technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs Inc DIGITAL DO DOLBY Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of DIGITAL Dolby Laboratories DivX Certified to play DivX video including premium content O Precautions When Displaying a Still Image A still image may cause permanent damage to the TV screen Do not display a still image on the LCD panel for more than 2 hours as it can cause screen image retention This image retention is also known as screen burn To avoid such image retention reduce the degree of brightness and contrast of the screen when displaying a still image Watching the LCD TV in 4 3 format for a long period of time may leave traces of borders displayed on the left Lo right and center of the screen caused by the difference of light emission on the screen Playing a DVD or a game gt console may cause a similar effect to the screen Damages caused by the above effect are not covered by the Warranty Displaying still images from Video games and PC for longer than a certain period of time may produce partial after images To prevent this effect reduce the brig
320. us E Exit play mode and return to the movie list lt gt Skip forwards or backwards through the movie file A Y Move to the first last of the file o the file at double speed This function may not be supported depending on the codec Playing the movie group 1 2 3 4 Press the A button to move to the Sort key Section Press the lt or gt button to select a sorting standard Press the Y or ENTER L lt button to move to the Group List Section Press the gt Play button Only the files of the selected group will start playing Alternatively Select a Sort key and then in the File List Section select the files contained in the desired group To move to the previous next group press the lt lt REW or gt gt FF button Press the TOOLS button Press the A or Y button to select Play Current Group then press the ENTER L lt button The movie files in the sorting group including the selected file are played Playing the selected movie files 1 2 3 Press the Y button to select the File List Section Press the lt or gt button to select the desired music file Press the Yellow button The v mark appears to the left of the selected movie file Repeat the above operation to select multiple movie files Press the gt Play ENTER Ls button Only the selected file is played Playing movie continuously If you exit the playing movie

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Bedienungsanleitung  HERMA Projector Safe  Inalambrico HYCD01 - Hyundai Power Products  37274 COF (Rev A) - Commercial Wheelchair Lifts  Garmin Software Version 0719.09 Cockpit Reference Guide  仙一凧ーSTER PLS33ー0 PLUSTER / PLS33ー0  ceress  Mode d`emploi  TELÉFONOS 2 HILOS 2-WIRE TELEPHONES  système électrique de la série 780 a été conçu essentiellement  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file